SYTEC I ADVAN. DIAG..pdf

TechnicalPublications

Copyright� 1999 by General Electric Company

Advanced Service DocumentationProperty of GE

For GE Service Personnel OnlyNo Rights Licensed – Do Not Use or Copy

Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited

2242063Revision 0

CT Sytec/Sytec i SeriesAdvanced Diagnostics

ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICSCT SYTEC/SYTEC i SERIES

2242063

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

a

REV 0

� THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

� IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHERTHAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDETRANSLATION SERVICES.

� DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICEMANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.

� FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJUR Y TO THE SERVICEPROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICALOR OTHER HAZARDS.

� CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

� SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRELANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRETRADUIRE.

� NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LEMANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.

� LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LETECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DESDANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

� DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

� FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNGZU SORGEN.

� VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESESKUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDENWURDE.

� WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET , SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGENDES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTENDURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGEGEFAHREN KOMMEN.

� ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

� SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICIT A UN IDIOMAQUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UNSERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.

� NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABERCONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.

� LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE ELPROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRANLESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRANATURALEZA.

WARNING

AVERTISSEMENT

WARNUNG

AVISO


2242063


b

REV 0

� ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRADISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.

� SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO AGEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DARESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.

� NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO ECOMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

� O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇADO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

� IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILESOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

� SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE ILMANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUT O A PROVVEDEREDIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.

� SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPOAVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO ILCONTENUTO.

� NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FARCOMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLAMANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PERFOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

ATENÇÃO

AVVERTENZA


2242063


c

REV 0

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein containedshould be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt toplace this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad toassist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.

Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, nopractical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator totake adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others toradiation.

It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with therecommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reportsavailable from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of theInternational Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.

The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.

Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

��

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall beperformed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performedby licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shallbe performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) arehighly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.

In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electricalwork on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-partyservice companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.


2242063


d

REV 0

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage inshipment ” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GeneralElectric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to thecarrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers heldfor inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requestedwithin this 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. Atthis time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, itemdamaged and extent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.

CAUTION

Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could causethis equipment to malfunction.

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,radio–controlled toy, etc.

Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.

Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an��

��


2242063


A

REV 0

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

0 Apr. 6, 1999 Initial release.. . . . . . . . .

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV

Title page 0. . . . . . . . Title page rear blank. a to d 0. . . . . . . . . . . . A 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . i 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii blank. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab 1 (System)i to ii 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 to 1–3 0. . . . . . . . 1–4 blank. . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 to 2–44 0. . . . . . . 3–1 to 3–26 0. . . . . . . 4–1 to 4–12 0. . . . . . . 5–1 to 5–15 0. . . . . . . 5–16 blank. . . . . . . . . . 6–1 to 6–57 0. . . . . . . 6–58 blank. . . . . . . . . . 7–1 to 7–7 0. . . . . . . . 7–8 blank. . . . . . . . . . .

Tab 2 (OC)i to ii 0. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1 to 1–15 0. . . . . . . 1–16 blank. . . . . . . . . . 2–1 to 2–16 0. . . . . . . 3–1 to 3–14 0. . . . . . . 4–1 to 4–8 0. . . . . . . . A–1 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2 blank. . . . . . . . . . .

Tab 3 (Table/Gantry)i 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii blank. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1 to 1–4 0. . . . . . . . 2–1 to 2–6 0. . . . . . . . 3–1 to 3–24 0. . . . . . . 4–1 to 4–6 0. . . . . . . .

Tab 4 (DAS/Detector)i 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 to 1–8 0. . . . . . . . 2–1 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2 blank. . . . . . . . . . .

Tab 5 (XG)i 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 to 1–5 0. . . . . . . . 1–6 blank. . . . . . . . . . .

Blank/Rear cover –. .


2242063


B

blank


2242063


i

REV 0

CONTENTS

SYSTEM (TAB 1)

IntroductionMaintenance Program –Support–Maintenance Program –Support Display–Maintenance Program –Others–

Maintenance Program –Class C Software–Message and Error Code ListsImage Spatial Resolution

OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 2)

Power Up Sequence

Off–Line TestETC Board TestLED DescriptionAppendix A

TABLE / GANTRY (T AB3)

LED and Switch DescriptionsTGP Power–On TestTGP Off–Line TestServo Amp. and Servo Motor

DAS / DETECTOR (TAB4)

Detector ChannelImage Problems

X–RAY GENERATOR (TAB7)

Failure Analysis


2242063


ii

blank


2242063


SYSTEMi

REV 0

SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 INTRODUCTION 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT – 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 GENERAL 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1 Functions of Support Programs 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs 2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 OFF LINE SCAN 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL 2–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 STATISTICS 2–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 ALIGNMENT 2–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE 2–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA 2–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 RAW DATA DIRECTORY 2–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY 2–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD 2–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD 2–36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD 2–38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS 2–41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 MTF SURVEY 2–43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLY – 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY 3–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 FILE SELECTION 3–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 START POSITION 3–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 RANGE 3–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 ROI 3–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 MAGNIFY 3–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 PROFILE (H) 3–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 PROFILE (V) 3–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 HISTOGRAM 3–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 NUMERICAL 3–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 WHERE 3–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 SET CURSOR 3–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 ERASE 3–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 GRID 3–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


SYSTEMii

REV 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS – 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 POST RECON 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 MT RECOVERY 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 OD SWEEPER 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY 4–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE 4–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 SERVICE MODE 4–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD 4–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – CLASS C SOFTW ARE – 5–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 INTRODUCTION 5–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment 5–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-4 Automated Post Recon 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP 5–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-1 Installation and Delete of Software 5–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-2 Operation 5–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4 HEAT SOAK 5–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-1 Installation and Delete of Software 5–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-2 Operation 5–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS 6–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 INTRODUCTION 6–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 MESSAGE LIST 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2-1 Message List 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-2 Error Message List 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 ERROR CODE LIST 6–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code 6–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code 6–36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-3 Display Error Code 6–41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code 6–50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-5 DMA Error Code 6–51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-6 RAWCTL Error Code 6–52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code 6–53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 – IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 DESCRIPTION 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 PROCEDURE 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-2 MTF Survey Program 7–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) 7–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


SYSTEM1–1

REV 0

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION

1-1 INTRODUCTION

This CT system provides the Power–on Test programs to intensify system failures. For this test, refer to the OperatorConsole tab of this manual. The following sections describe how to use the service maintenance programs and errorcodes.

� SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORTSECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLAYSECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERSSECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – CLASS C SOFTWARE

These sections describe Maintenance Programs used during system service. These programs are usedto adjust and/or analyze the system.

� SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS

This section contains the system messages, alarm messages and error messages sent to the status dis-play. These messages are used to analyze system failure.


2242063


SYSTEM1–2

REV 0

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Section 2 ∼ 5 describe the functions of the service Maintenance Programs contained in the Maintenance Menu.It includes the following programs:

9. SUPPORT

10. SUPPORT DISPLAY

11. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION

12. CT No. ADJUST

13. POST RECON

14. CUSTOM PARAMETERS

15. ME RECOVERY

16. OD SWEEPER

17. OD STUDY RECOVERY

18. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

19. SERVICE MODE

20. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.


2242063


SYSTEM1–3

REV 0

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)

Operational Description

Ensure that ‘NEW PATIENT’ on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or plasma display screen blinks, and then touch the‘Maintenance’ prompt until it inverts to black to display the Maintenance Menu.

*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

1. CALIBRATION

Select No. =

Insert the ‘BOOT’ disk into the floppy disk drive.

Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.


1. SUPPORT2. SUPPORT DISPLAY3. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION4. CT No. ADJUST5. POST RECON6. CUSTOM PARAMETERS7. MT RECOVERY8. OD SWEEPER9. OD STUDY RECOVERY10. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE11. SERVICE MODE12. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

Select No. =

Type the corresponding number and press Enter to start the program.


2242063


SYSTEM1–4

blank


2242063


SYSTEM2–1

REV 0

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM– SUPPORT –

2-1 GENERAL

2-1-1 Functions of Support Programs

The SUPPORT contains the following menus:

� OFF–LINE SCAN ––– Collects Scan raw data

� TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ––– On–line control of Table and Gantry

� STATISTICS ––– Data statistics

� ALIGNMENT ––– X–ray alignment

� CAL WITH MEAN FILE ––– Calculation between MEAN FILE #1 and MEAN FILE #2

� CAL WITH RAW DATA ––– Calculation between RAW DATA and MEAN FILE

� RAW DATA DIRECTORY ––– Shows the raw data information list of the system

� MEAN FILE DIRECTORY ––– Shows the mean file information list of the system

� FD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

� MT DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

� MOD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

� WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

� MTF SURVEY ––– Calculates the image spatial resolution


2242063


SYSTEM2–2

REV 0

2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs

1. Select 1.(SUPPORT) from the Maintenance menu to display the following Support Menu:

*** SUPPORT MENU ***

1. OFF LINE SCAN2. TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL3. STATISTICS4. ALIGNMENT5. CAL WITH MEAN FILE6. CAL WITH RAW DATA7. RAW DATA DIRECTORY8. MEAN FILE DIRECTORY9. FD DUMP/LOAD10. MT DUMP/LOAD11. MOD DUMP/LOAD12. WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS13. MTF SURVEY

Select No. =

2. Select an item from the menu. When you exit an item, this menu automatically reappears for the next selection.

Note

� When the software requires an entry, it either displays the most recently set parameter for that selection,or a default parameter. Press [ENTR] to accept the displayed parameter.

� Press [END] key to terminate the current process and return (send) software control to a level one levelprior to (higher than) the terminated process.When using a support program, press the [Cancel] key to directly return to the Support menu.The following diagram lists software levels

NEW PATIENT BLINKING

MAINTENANCE menu

SUPPORT menu

KIND OF SCAN menu

AXIAL: SCAN OR EDIT

SoftkeyPrompt

Select:1

Select:1

Select:1

END

END

END or Cancel

END or Cancel

Cancel

Cancel

� If you make an improper entry, the software displays the following message and waits for a valid input.

** INVALID ENTRY


2242063


SYSTEM2–3

REV 0

2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs (continued)

Note

� If a system error occurs, the software displays the following message and sends control one level higher,to the prior level.

** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX (Error Code)

� A raw data file created by a Support program has the following ID No.:

00 : 00000. XX. 01 ; 01

Station Study Series ImageAcquisition

Here XX: 1 ∼ 99. A raw data file can be selected by entering a Series number only, since the rest is pre–de-termined as above.

� The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.


2242063


SYSTEM2–4

REV 0

2-2 OFF LINE SCAN

This menu is used to perform off–line scans (axial, stationary, or scout) and collect raw data files.

A series No. must be specified every time an off–line scan is performed. If a new series No. is not specified everytime, the software will overwrite the existing file. It will not automatically update the series No., even if scan parametersare modified.

Enter 1 (OFF LINE SCAN) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:

*** KIND OF SCAN ***

1. AXIAL2. STATIONARY3. SCOUT

Select No.=

Axial Scan

1. Enter 1 (AXIAL) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:

Select No.= 1

*** AXIAL SCAN ***

SCAN TIME 2.7 sec (3.6sec in CT Sytec 2000i, S)CW/CCW CWTHICKNESS 10.0 mmSCAN FOV 25 cmRECON FOV 25.0 cmXG, ROTOR XG ONkV 120 kVmA 40 mA

1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.=

This list contains either default scan parameters or previously selected parameters.


2242063


SYSTEM2–5

REV 0

2-2 OFF LINE SCAN (continued)

Axial Scan (continued)

2. To modify the parameter, select 2 (EDIT).

Select No.= 2

SCAN TIME <1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>( 2 )=CW/CCW <1:CW, 2:CCW>( 1 )=THICKNESS <1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>( 1 )=SCAN FOV <1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>( 1 )=RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>( 25.0 )=XG, ROTOR <1:XG ON, 2:ROTOR ON, 3:BOTH OFF>( 1 )=mA <l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>( 1 )

NoteThe mA parameter only appears when XG ON is selected.

3. Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.

1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.= 1

4. Specify a Raw Data File ID No. (Series No.:1 ∼ 99; Study No. is fixed at ‘00000’.).(Remember to change the series No. when acquiring multiple scans) Then, proceed to scan operation.

*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

* Enter SERIES No. = 1

PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN

** SCAN END

NoteThe CRT either displays previously set scan parameters or default parameters.Once you quit the Support Program, the scan parameters revert to the default values.


2242063


SYSTEM2–6

REV 0


Stationary Scan

1. Enter 2 (STATIONARY) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:

Select No.= 2

*** STATIONARY SCAN ***

AZIMUTH Present DegreeSCAN TIME 2.7 secCW/CCW CWTHICKNESS 10.0 mmSCAN FOV 25 cmRECON FOV 25.0 cmXG, ROTOR XG ONkV 120 kVmA 40 mA

1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.=


The Gantry does not rotate during a stationary scan.Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 and 355 degrees.The 0 degrees position is equivalent to the X–ray tube at 12 o’clock; the 90 degrees position is equivalent to thetube at the 3 o’clock position (viewed from Table).The rest parameters are identical to the axial scan.

Select No.= 2

AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg] –1:Present deg>( –1 )SCAN TIME <1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>( 2 )=CW/CCW <1:CW, 2:CCW>( 1 )=THICKNESS <1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>( 1 )=SCAN FOV <1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>( 1 )=RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>( 25.0 )=XG, ROTOR <1:XG ON, 2:ROTOR ON, 3:BOTH OFF>( 1 )=mA <l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>( 1 )



2242063


SYSTEM2–7

REV 0


Stationary Scan (continued)


1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.= 1



* Enter SERIES No. = 1

PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN

** SCAN END



2242063


SYSTEM2–8

REV 0


Scout Scan

1. Enter 3 (SCOUT) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:

Select No.= 3

*** SCOUT SCAN ***

AZIMUTH 0 degTABLE 250 mmTHICKNESS 1.0 mmXG, ROTOR XG ONkV 120 kVmA 40 mA

1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.=


The scout scan list contains parameters common to the axial scan, and, in addition, Azimuth and Table parame-ters:Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 degrees and 355degrees.Enter a Table travel parameter (scanned length) (between 50mm and 500mm: 1mm step).

Select No.= 2

AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg] –1:Present deg>( –1 )TABLE <50, 51, 52, .....499, 500 [mm]>( 250 )XG, ROTOR <1:XG ON, 2:ROTOR ON, 3:BOTH OFF>( 1 )=mA <l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>( 1 )



1. SCAN2. EDIT

Select No.= 1


2242063


SYSTEM2–9

REV 0


Scout Scan (continued)


*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT **** Enter SERIES No.= 1

5. Upon entering the Series No., the Gantry moves to the designated azimuth position.Push the blinking SET button , and the Table will move for –20mm in the IN direction. Then push the blinkingSTART button and hold it until the scan is over; the Table will move in the OUT direction for the designatedtravel plus +20mm.



2242063


SYSTEM2–10

REV 0

2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL

On–line control of the Table and Gantry can be checked with this program by positioning the Table or Gantry to arbi-trary positions. The Table is moved to an entered absolute position. The X–ray tube is moved to an entered azimuthposition (multiples of five degrees between 0 and .355 degrees).

Enter 2 (TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:

*** TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ***

1. TABLE CONTROL2. GANTRY CONTROL

Select No.=

Table Control

1. Enter 1 (TABLE CONTROL) in ‘TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL’ menu to display the following TABLE CONTROLparameters:

Select No.= 1

*** TABLE CONTROL ***

Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION< –765.0mm (IN) <–––> (OUT) 765.0mm > = 100

KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>

Press <ENTER> to Move

*** TABLE CONTROL ***

Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION< –765.0mm (IN) <–––> (OUT) 765.0mm > =

The above is an example where the Table is moved to the 100mm position. Enter values falling within the IN andOUT limit values (–765.0mm and +765.0mm, in this example). The travel range (OUT–IN) is 1530mm. When the required travel is 20mm or less, the following message does not appear but Table starts moving uponpressing [ENTER].

KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>

Press <ENTER> to Move


2242063


SYSTEM2–11

REV 0

2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL (continued)

Gantry Control

NoteWith this program, the Gantry rotates at the speed for a 1.8sec. When you select 2 or 3, you will haveto specify scan time.

1. Enter 2 (GANTRY CONTROL) in the ‘TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL’ menu to display the following GANTRYCONTROL parameter:

Select No.= 2

*** GANTRY CONTROL ***

1. GANTRY POSITION2. CW REST POSITION3. CCW REST POSITION

Select No.=

2. To set the azimuth position, select 1 (GANTRY POSITION).

Select No.= 1

Enter GANTRY POSITION <0, 5, 10, ..., 355 DEG> =

3. To rotate the Gantry to CW/CCW rest position, select 2/3 (CW/CCW REST POSITION).

Select No.= 2 (or 3 )

Enter SCAN TIME<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec> =


2242063


SYSTEM2–12

REV 0

2-4 STATISTICS

This program displays DAS data, including offset data, in decimal or hexadecimal numbers, with or without corrections(offset file correction and/or reference channel correction), or performs arithmetic operations (average, Log, etc.) onthe raw data. You can store processed or unprocessed DAS data to MEAN file or RAW file.

Enter 3 (STATISTICS) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:

*** STATISTICS ***


Enter ID No.=

Enter ID No. (Series #) of the Raw data file to process.

NoteYou can shorten the ID No. (STUDY #. SER #. ACQ #).

Example:0.4.1 → 40.6.1 → 6

Enter ID No.= 0.4.1

STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATA & TIME

0000 04 01 H CW 2.7 000 +0 10.0 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:56

*** RAW DATA FORMAT ***

1.OFFSET AVERAGE2.DAS DATA3.FAN

Select No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–13

REV 0

2-4 STATISTICS (continued)

Offset Average

During each scan, the software collects 64 views of data (offset data) to obtain offset average data for each channel,just before x–ray exposure starts. This program examines the offset average data, and the maximum or minimumoffset data and standard deviation data of each channel. You can also store this data to MEAN FILE.

1. Select 1 (OFFSET AVERAGE). The following screen appears.

*** OFFSET AVERAGE ***

MAX MAX +346.0000 XXX ch XX viewMIN +221.0000 XXX ch XX viewAVE +295.4994

MIN MAX +338.5000 XXX ch XX viewMIN +208.0000 XXX ch XX viewAVE +266.5227

MEAN MAX +340.5078 XXX chMIN +218.0781 XXX chAVE +281.0197

S.D. MAX +34.0549 XXX chMIN +0.4558 XXX chAVE +9.8788 XXX ch

*** KIND OF DATA ***

1.MAX2.MIN3.AVE4.S.D.

Select No.=

‘OFFSET AVERAGE’ displays the following data, and channel and view No. that produced these data:

The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MAX data of each channel.The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MIN data of each channel.The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MEAN data of each channel.The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) data of each channel.

Ch1 2

View1

View64

847

Offset View

MAX ��

MIN �� MEAN �� S.D. ��

Ch

••••

••••


2242063


SYSTEM2–14

REV 0


Offset Average (continued)

2. Select one of ‘KIND OF DATA’ item from the menu. Example: If you select 1 (MAX), the following screen appears.

Select No.= 1** DISPLAY/FILING **

1.DISPLAY2.STORE FILE

Select No.=

a. DISPLAY:

This selection numerically displays the offset data foe each channel on the screen.

Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.

Select No.= 1

Select CHANNEL No.(1) =

Press [RTN] to see data from the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, entera channel number, and that channel’s data is displayed in the first line of the table followed by data from thefollowing channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.

CHANNEL MAX DATA0001 +313.5000 +236.5000 +319.0000 +278.00000005 +277.5000 +276.5000 +323.0000 +322.50000009 +320.5000 +320.0000 +326.5000 +326.50000013 +301.0000 +299.5000 +249.0000 +248.5000

.

.

.0085 +288.5000 +291.5000 +297.5000 +297.50000089 +309.0000 +286.5000 +277.0000 +274.50000093 +284.5000 +284.0000 +284.0000 +284.00000097 +296.5000 +296.5000 +300.5000 +300.0000

Select CHANNEL No.(105) =

NoteThe displayed channel Nos. correspond to as described below.

Ch.1 ∼ 635 : active channelsCh.636 ∼ 679 : reference channels


2242063


SYSTEM2–15

REV 0


Offset Average (continued)

b. STORE:

This selection stores the offset data (MAX, MIN, MEAN, or S.D. data) to a MEAN file. The mean file takes theform shown below:

1 ∼ 635 R1 ∼ R22 R23 ∼ R44

Where,1 ∼ 635: offset data of active channelsR1 ∼ R44: offset data of reference channelsYou can store up to 16 MEAN files. Enter a file No.(1 ∼ 16) and a comment (39 characters maximum).

Select 2 (STORE FILE) from the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.

Select No.= 2*** STORE FILE ***

Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> = 1Enter COMMENT = MAX OF OFFSET

** STORE** STORE END


2242063


SYSTEM2–16

REV 0


DAS Data

This program displays DAS data transferred from the DAS to the IPU (via DAS Buffer Unit in DISP), with no datacorrection (offset file correction or reference channel correction) applied to the data. Special floating point hexadeci-mal numbers are displayed for each channel, or for each view, with the channel and view numbers indicating the trans-fer sequence. It also displays Offset data. Refer to the Note followed.

1. Select 2 (DAS DATA) from the ‘RAW DATA FORMAT’ menu.

2. Enter 1 (VIEW) to display the channel data on a selected view, or 2 (CHANNEL) to display the view data on aselected channel.

Select No.= 2*** DAS DATA ***

1.VIEW2.CHANNEL

Select No.= 1Enter VIEW No.= 100** START

Enter CHANNEL No.(1) =

3. Press [RTN] to display blocks of data, as shown below. Each block consists of 31 data. Each view contains 22blocks. To see subsequent channel data, enter a channel number, and that channel’s data is displayed in thefirst line of the table, followed by data from the following channels. The number in parentheses is the default num-ber.

CHANNEL VIEW No.= 01000001 00E0 04C1 086A 08FF 09E8 0A94 0C6B 138F0009 140B 1483 1550 1620 176F 188B 1A45 1B6E0017 1DE3 23EE 24AC 25BE 2615 273F 2835 28FD

.

.

.0180 2D85 2DE6 2E2F 2DC2 2C1E 2CD7 2BD30187 29C7 290B 27E2 26FE 2603 255B 245B 23C40195 1D3A 1AB3 1989 17DE 1703 1632 1524 1468

Enter CHANNEL No.(203) =

4. Press [END] to return to ‘Enter VIEW No.=’ to select and see channel data from different view.

ENTER CHANNEL No.(203) = ENDEnd of displayEnter VIEW No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–17

REV 0


DAS Data (continued)

Note

� Data format (Special floating–point)

DAS Count = 2N Σ bi x 2i (bi: ‘0’ or ‘1’)

a1 a0 N0 0 –10 1 11 0 31 1 5

Example (540B)16 = (01 01 0100 0000 1011)2 = 21 x (1 x 163 +4 x 162 +0 x 16 + 11)= (10262)10

a1 a0 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

� The displayed channel and view numbers only indicate the transfer sequence of DAS data; they are notthe real channel or view numbers.682 pieces of data are transferred during one view period.(682 = 31 channels (1 block) x 22 (triggers))

� The offset view numbers and active view numbers are as follows:View 1 ∼ 65: offset views (one dummy view + 64 views)View 66 ∼ 714: active views (one dummy view + 648 views)


2242063


SYSTEM2–18

REV 0


FAN

This selection displays raw data in decimal numbers with or without applying corrections (offset file correction and/orreference channel correction) and/or arithmetic operation (natural logarithm) to DAS data.The channel numbers displayed correspond to the DAS or Detector channel numbers as described below:

Ch.1 ∼ 635 : active channels

Ch.636 ∼ 679 : reference channels

You can store the processed or unprocessed raw data to a MEAN file or RAW file.

1. Select 3 (FAN) from the ‘RAW DATA FORMAT’ menu and choose whether or not to apply corrections or conver-sion to the data.

Select No.= 3*** OPERATION SELECT ***

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:NO> (2)=NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=

NoteREFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:No>

6ch : Performs the reference channel correction using the mean of data of Ch.1 ∼ 3, Ch.633 ∼ 635.22 block : Performs the reference channel correction using the normal reference channel data.

** START

MAX MAX +30376.000000 XXX ch XX viewMIN +1001.500000 XXX.ch XX viewAVE +10700.650000

MIN MAX +28112.000000 XXX ch XX viewMIN +912.499900 XXX ch XX viewAVE +9979.113000

MEAN MAX +29012.460000 XXX chMIN +962.605900 XXX chAVE +10256.390000

S.D. MAX +981.421200 XXX chMIN +6.808363 XXX chAVE +153.021000

*** KIND OF DATA ***

1. ORIGINAL2. MAX3. MIN4. MEAN5. S.D.Select No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–19

REV 0


FAN (continued)

The system displays the following data after calculations:


Ch1 2

View65

View712

679

Active View

MAX ��


Ch

••••

••••


2242063


SYSTEM2–20

REV 0


FAN (continued)

2. Select Kind of Data.

ORIGINAL displays the channel data for a certain view, or displays the view data for a certain channel.MAX, MIN, MEAN and S.D. display the maximum, minimum, mean, and S.D. data of each channel.

The following describes the procedures for each data.

1.ORIGINAL :

a. DISPLAY:

*** DISPLAY/FILING ***

1. DISPLAY2. STORE FILE

Select No.= 1

*** DISPLAY ***

1. VIEW2. CHANNELSelect No.= 1

Enter VIEW No.= 10Enter CHANNEL No.(1)=

CHANNEL VIEW No.= 0100001 +311.000000 +234.000000 +318.000000 +274.5000000005 +276.000000 +275.000000 +273.000000 +322.0000000009 +318.000000 +319.000000 +269.000000 +325.000000

.

.

.0093 +308.500000 +285.500000 +276.500000 +273.0000000097 +272.000000 +285.500000 +274.500000 +273.0000000101 +245.000000 +295.500000 +295.500000 +299.000000

Enter CHANNEL No.(105)=

b. STORE


Enter RAW FILE No.<1–3> 3** START** STORE END

1 ∼ 635: active channels

R1 ∼ R44 (636 ∼ 679): reference channels

1Ch

View1View64View65

View712

Offset Data

Active Data

635Ch

R44Ch


2242063


SYSTEM2–21

REV 0


FAN (continued)

2.MAX:

NoteMIN, MEAN, S.D. menus are similar to this MAX menu.

a. DISPLAY



Select No.= 1

Select Channel No.(1) = ‘CR’

CHANNEL MAX DATA0001 +1712.000000 +1606.500000 +1646.000000 +1643.5000000005 +1630.500000 +1595.500000 +1716.000000 +1722.000000

.

.

.0096 +1930.000000 +1870.000000 +2046.000000 +1916.0000000097 +2004.000000 +1972.000000 +2038.000000 +2018.0000000101 +2084.000000 +2058.000000 +2086.000000 +2116.000000

Select CHANNEL No.(105)=

b. STORE:




Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> = 4Enter COMMENT = MAX DATA OF CHANNEL** START** STORE END



Select No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–22

REV 0

2-5 ALIGNMENT

This menu is used to center the phantoms and check or adjust X–ray alignment. Three programs are available forX–ray check/adjustment procedures: GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, and FILTER CENTERCHANNEL. The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program aligns the X–ray tube to the Detector. The FILTER CENTERCHANNEL program checks/adjusts filter alignment to the Detector.

You can display the calculated center channels at each view (1 ∼ 648) on the screen or store them to MEAN FILE(No.1 ∼ 16).

Enter 4 (ALIGNMENT) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:

*** ALIGNMENT ***

1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL4. PHANTOM CENTERING

Select No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–23

REV 0

2-5 ALIGNMENT (continued)

Gravity SAG Amplitude

For this procedure, the gravity pin is attached to the X–ray tube collimator during axial scans. This program measuresfluctuations of the projection of the pin onto the Detector to check for abnormalities of the rotating mechanism (bend,vibrations, etc.).Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2,Off–Line Scan), following the instructions described below:

1. Air File:Remove the Bow–tie filter from the collimator, and scan air. Record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

2. POC File (Pin on Collimator):Remove the Bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Attach the SAG alignment pin to the collimator. Scan the pin,and record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

3. Select 1 (GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.

4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and POC Files . (ID No. = Series No.)

*** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)Enter ID No.= 1

RAW DATA FILE (POC)Enter ID No.= 2

NoteIf the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;

** FILE NOTING

The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results:

** START

CENTER CH. = aaa.aaaAVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx

aaa.aaa

xxx.xxx

: 1/2 x (Maximum center channel No. in all views + Minimum center channel No. in all views)

: Average of center channel numbers at each view

5. You can display the center channels at each view or store them in the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.


2242063


SYSTEM2–24

REV 0


ISO Center Channel

The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program determines the center channel of the Detector which receives the projectionof a pin placed in the reconstruction area. The system determines the center channel at each view, then calculatesthe average center channel and displays it along with instructions to shift the X–ray tube into proper alignment. Shiftthe X–ray tube tangentially to the rotation circle. The correct ISO center channel is 317.75 Ch.The adjustment tolerance is ± 0.02 Ch. Perform four off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following theinstructions described below:


2. Pin File:Remove the Bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Place a steel pin (6mm in diameter) about 5cm off the centerof reconstruction area. Scan the pin, and record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

3. Select 2 (ISO CENTER CHANNEL) from ‘Alignment’ menu.

4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Pin Files . (ID No. = Series No.)

*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***


RAW DATA FILE (PIN)Enter ID No.= 4

NoteIf the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;

** FILE NOTING


** START

ISO AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 ± 0.02)

MOVE TUBE C.CCC MM RIGHT

XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.

5. With the tube at the Gantry 12 o’clock position, move the tube right or left, if viewed from the Table for C.CCCmm,according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the Iso center channel equals 317.75 ± 0.02Ch.



2242063


SYSTEM2–25

REV 0


Filter Center Channel

The FILTER CENTER CHANNEL program measures the center channel receiving the projection of the filter onto theDetector. The software measures the center channel for each view, then calculates and displays the average centerchannel along with instructions to shift the filter into proper alignment. The correct filter center channel equals the isocenter channel: 317.75Ch. The adjustment tolerance is ± 0.3Ch. Shift the filter tangentially to the rotation circle. Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following the instructions below:


2. Filter File:Install the Bow–tie filter, and scan air. Record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

3. Select 3 (FILTER CENTER CHANNEL) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.

4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Filter Files . (ID No. = Series No.)

*** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL ***


RAW DATA FILE (FILTER)Enter ID No.= 5


** START

FILTER AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 ± 0.30)

MOVE FILTER D.DDD MM RIGHT

XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.

5. With the tube at the Gantry 12 o’clock position, move the filter right or left, if viewed from the Table for D.DDDmm,according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the filter center channel equals 317.75 ± 0.3Ch.



2242063


SYSTEM2–26

REV 0


Phantom Centering

The PHANTOM CENTERING program centers the phantoms on the scan plane. After calculating actual phantomposition, software instructs you to shift the phantom to center it. Shift the phantom right or left and up or down (viewedfrom the Table).Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following the instructions below:

1. Air File:Bow–tie filter installed. Scan air, and record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

2. Phantom File:Bow–tie filter installed. Scan phantom, and record the series No.(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))

3. Select 4 (PHANTOM CENTERING) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.

4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Phantom Files . (ID No. = Series No.)

*** PHANTOM CENTERING ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR [CW])Enter ID No.= 6

RAW DATA FILE (PHANTOM [CW])Enter ID No.= 7


** START

MOVE DOWN e.ee MM (± 0.15)MOVE RIGHT f.ff MM ( ± 0.15)

*** ALIGNMENT ***

1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL4. PHANTOM CENTERING

Select No.=

5. Move the phantom up or down (according to the instruction) for e.ee mm and left or right (viewed from the Table)for f.ff mm. Repeat the procedure until instructed to move the phantom 0.0 (± 0.15mm) .


2242063


SYSTEM2–27

REV 0


Display/Filing

The DISPLAY/FILING menu displays or stores the center channels at each view calculated in the GRAVITY SAGAMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, or FILTER CENTER CHANNEL programs to MEAN FILE (No.1 ∼ 16).

The following menu appears after the calculations:



Select No.=

An example for DISPLAY and STORE FILE:



Select No.= 1

Select VIEW No. (1)=

Enter a view No.




Enter MEAN FILE No. <1–16>= 1Enter COMMENT = CENTER CH OF ISO

** STORE END


2242063


SYSTEM2–28

REV 0

2-6 CALCULA TION WITH MEAN FILE

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) between Mean files, or ap-plies some filters to a Mean file. Create Mean files with OFFSET AVERAGE, FAN (except for ORIGINAL), and ALIGN-MENT (except for PHANTOM CENTERING) programs. The ALIGNMENT Mean file consists of each view’s channelnumber, so calculations may not be performed between the ALIGNMENT file and the ordinary Mean file. The programalso displays Mean file data, the calculation results, and stores the calculation results to Mean file.

Enter 5 (CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE) in the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:

** CALUCLATION WITH MEAN FILE **

1. FILE 1 + FILE 22. FILE 1 – FILE 23. FILE 1 * FILE 24. FILE 1 / FILE 25. DIFFERENTIAL FILTER6. LOW PASS FILTER7. HIGH PASS FILTER8. DISPLAY

Select No.=

Example: Choose 1 (FILE1 + FILE2) and software performs the following calculation:

AC = EC +FC, where

EC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 1FC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 2AC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated fileC : Ch. No. Ch.1 ∼ 635 active channels

Ch.636 ∼ 679 reference channelsA680 ∼ A1024 : do not care


2242063


SYSTEM2–29

REV 0

2-6 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE (continued)

Menu No. 1, 2, 3, 4

1. Enter Mean File No.

*** MEAN FILE SELECTION

SELECT MEAN FILE No.<1–16> AS FILE 1Enter MEAN FILE No.= 1SELECT MEAN FILE No. <1–16> AS FILE 2Enter MEAN FILE No.= 2

The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.

Menu No. 5, 6, 7

1. Enter Mean File No.

***MEAN FILE SELECTION ***Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>_

The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.

Note

� When you select 5 (DIFFERENTIAL FILTER), the system performs the following calculation:

DC = EC+1 – EC, whereEC : Data of Ch. C in the selected Mean fileDC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated fileC : Ch. No.

� Menu No. 6, 7: These are used in the YMS Manufacturing only.

Display/Filing

DISPLAY : Displays most recent calculations, or any mean file data.

FILING : Stores the calculations to a mean file.



Select No.=


2242063


SYSTEM2–30

REV 0

2-7 CALCULA TION WITH RAW DATA

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division) between a mean file anda raw data file. Up to three raw data files (numbered 1, 2, 3) can be stored in the Support program.

Select 6 (CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA) from the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:

*** CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA ***

1. RAW + FILE2. RAW + FILE3. FILE – RAW4. RAW * FILE5. RAW / FILE6. FILE / RAW

For example, RAW + FILE is selected, calculations illustrated below are performed.

Illustration 2–3 File Formats

View 1

View 64View 65

View 712

Ch1

C:1∼679

Offset Data

Mean FileMC

DV,CV : 1 ∼ 712C : 1 ∼ 679

View 648

View 1

Ch679

Ch1

Ch679

EV,CV : 1 ∼ 648C : 1 ∼ 679

CALCULATED FILERAW DATA FILE

EV, C = DV + 64, C + MC, whereV : View number 1 ∼ 648C : Channel number 1 ∼ 679


2242063


SYSTEM2–31

REV 0

2-7 CALCULA TION WITH RAW DATA (continued)

1. Select a kind of operation and enter Mean File No. and Raw Data File No.

Select No.= 1Enter RAW DATA FILE No.<1–3> _Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> _

The following data are shown after calculation:


Ch1 2

View65

View712

679

Active View

MAX ��


Ch

••••

••••

Then, ‘KIND OF DATA’ menu appears:

** KIND OF DATA **

1. ORIGINAL2. MAX3. MIN4. MEAN5. S.D.

Select No.=

2. For the subsequent procedures, refer to ‘KIND OF DATA’ in Section 2-4, FAN. This menu displays the calculatedfile or saves it to a RAW FILE or MEAN FILE.


2242063


SYSTEM2–32

REV 0

2-8 RAW DATA DIRECTORY

This menu displays a raw data file directory. Each raw data file is displayed with scan parameter information, STUDYNo., SERIES No., ACQUISITION No. and DATE and TIME. Raw data files are listed in chronological order, with themost recently scanned file at the top of the list.

Select 7 (RAW DATA DIRECTORY) from the ‘Support’ menu.

STUDY SER ACQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA DATE & TIME

00000 03 01 H CW 2.7 000 00 10 25 120 040 1992/07/01 15:22:05

Study No.

Series No.

AcquisitionNo.

Head/FeetFirst

Scan TypeAPLTAZCW

CCW

Scan Time1.82.74.5

15:

355

Vale ofTable

Movement(mm)

10531

253542

120

160130100806040

Date and Time of Scanningyyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss

Press [RTN] to continue.Or press [END] to end.


2242063


SYSTEM2–33

REV 0

2-9 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY

Select 8 (MEAN FILE DIRECTORY) to display the directory of mean files and warm–up work files.

MEAN FILENo COMMENT DATE & TIME1 1994/09/10 16:55:442 1994/09/10 15:02:543 1994/09/05 18:51:254 MAX DATA OF CHANNEL 1994/09/09 20:55:125 WITHOUT FILTER. WITH OFFSET CORR. 1994/09/29 21:23:426 001 CAL 1994/09/28 11:14:127 WARM UP SD 1994/19/14 12:58:368 1994/09/06 13:37:10

WARM UP WORK FILENo DATE & TIME1 1994/10/09 10:10:102 1994/10/09 10:30:33

Press <END> to END

You can store up to 16 mean files in the SUPPORT program, numbered 1 to 16.


2242063


SYSTEM2–34

REV 0

2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD

This menu dumps raw data files from the hard DISK to FD, or loads a raw data file from FD to the hard disk. Inseta floppy disk in the FD unit (it takes two floppy disks to store one raw data file).

Select 9 (FD DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu. Enter the ID No. The following menu appears:

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (FD) ***1. DUMP (DISK –> FD)2. LOAD (FD –> DISK)Select No.= _

Dump (from Disk to FD)

NoteVerify that the floppy disk to be used is write–enabled before starting to dump.

The example below shows a raw data file of ID No. 20.1.4 (Study#:20, Ser#:1, Acq#:4) is dumped to two floppy disks.

Select No.= 1PRESS <END> TO ENDEnter ID No.= 20.1.4** DUMP START

1. After you enter the ID No., software initialized the floppy disk with VOLUME name ‘FRAW’ and USER No. 0, andthen starts the dump procedure with File name FRAW:0...RAW DATA n VR(n=0, 1, 2......).

NoteIf the FD is protected for write, the following message is displayed:

** FD NOT READYAfter Inserting FD, Press <ENTR>

After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> (Insert the second floppy disk)** DUMP START

**DUMP COMPLETE

2. When the floppy disk becomes full, the CRT displays, ‘After Inserting Another FD, press <ENTR>’.

Continue to Dump? <0:Yes, 1:No> _

3. If you want to continue the dump procedure, enter 0(Yes).

After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> _

4. Replace the current floppy disk with another one, or the current floppy disk will be overwritten.


2242063


SYSTEM2–35

REV 0

2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from FD to Disk)

The example below shows that a raw data file occupying two floppy disks is loaded to Series No. 44 (Study#:0, Ser#:44, Acq#:1, Image#:1).

1. Insert the raw data floppy disk into the FD unit.

2. Enter Series No. (Station#:0, Study#:0, Acq#:1, Image#:1) (The raw data file is contained on two floppy disks.)

*** RAW DATA LOAD FROM FD ***PRESS <END> TO ENDEnter SERIES No.= 44** LOAD START

After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>** LOAD START

** LOAD COMPLETEContinue to Load ? <0:Yes, 1:No> _

Note

� If the current floppy disk does not have VOLUME name ‘RRAW’, the following message appears:

** ILLEGAL FD VOLUME ID = XXXXAfter Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> _

� If the File name is the floppy disk is not right, the message below appears:

** ILLEGAL FILE NAMEAfter Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> _


2242063


SYSTEM2–36

REV 0

2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD

This menu dumps raw data files from DISK to MT, or loads raw data files from MT to DISK.

Select 10 (MT DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MT) **

1. DUMP ( DISK → MT )2. LOAD ( MT → DISK )Select No.= _

Dump (from Disk to MT)

NoteVerify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY) and TAPE is not protected.

1. Select 1 (DUMP). The following menu appears:

*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MT) ***

1. APPEND2. REWRITE

2. Select 1.APPEND or 2.REWRITE.

APPEND : Writes data after the existing data on Mag tape (does not write over existing data)

REWRITE : Writes data from the beginning of Mag tape (writes over existing data on Mag tape)

3. The example below shows:A raw data file of ID No.3 (Ser#:3) on DISK is dumped to FILE No.0 on MT.(MT file numbers can not be arbitrarily assigned; they should be 0, 1, 2,... from the beginning of Mag tape.)

4. Enter ID No. (Ser#).

Select No.= 2** FILE No.= 0*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

Enter IN No.= 3

** FILE No.= 1*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

Enter ID No.= (<END>)

Dump start OK? <0:OK, 1:No> 0** DUMPED FILE No.= 0

** FILE No.= 0*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

Enter ID No.= _


2242063


SYSTEM2–37

REV 0

2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from MT to Disk)

NoteVerify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY).

1. Select 2 (LOAD).

2. Select MT START FILE No.

3. The example below shows:A FILE No.0 on MT is loaded to Series No.30 (Station#:0, Study#:0, Ser#:30, Acq#:1, Image#:1).The software waits for the input of a Series No.(destination) for the next File No.1 on MT.

NoteThe File No. displayed thereafter automatically increases by 1 every time a new file is loaded.

*** LOAD (FROM MT TO DISK) ***

Enter MT START FILE No.= 0** FILE No.= 0


Enter SERIES No.= 30

** FILE No.= 1*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***Enter SERIES No. = (<END>)Load start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0*** LOADED SERIES No.= 30

** FILE No.= 1


Enter SERIES No.= _


2242063


SYSTEM2–38

REV 0

2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD

This function dumps raw data files from DISK to MOD, or loads raw data files from MOD to DISK.Insert a magnetic optical disk in the MoD unit.

Select 11 (MOD DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu.

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **1. DUMP (DISK –> MOD)2. LOAD (MOD –> DISK)3. DIRECTORY4. INITIALIZE

Select No.=

Dump (from Disk to MOD)

NoteVerify that the magnetic optical disk is write enables.

1. Select 1 (DUMP). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.

*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MOD) ***

Volume Name = XXXX

The file No. (0, 1, 2,...) on the MOD are displayed, where raw data files will be dumped.

** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

** FILE No.= XXEnter ID No. [00:00000.01.01;01] = _

2. Enter the ID No. of the raw data file , and then the file No. is updated, waiting for another file ID No. By pressing<END>, the dump procedure starts with the following message.

Dump Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0

** DUMP STAR** DUMPED FILE No.= XX** DUMPED FILE No.= XX

::

** XX Files dumped **

Software stars the dump procedure with File name ORAW:0...RAWn. VR(n=0, 1, 2,....=FILE No.).


2242063


SYSTEM2–39

REV 0

2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from MOD to Disk)

1. Insert the magnetic optical disk into the MOD unit.

2. Select 2 (LOAD). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.

*** LOAD (FROM MOD TO DISK) ***

volume Name = xxxx

3. Enter the file No. (0, 1, 2, ...) within the MOD, from which the raw data will be loaded onto the hard disk.

Enter MOD START FILE No.= _

** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

** FILE No.= XX

Enter SERIES No.= _

4. Enter the Series No. of the raw data file (the ID No. of the raw data files which will be loaded onto the disk are0:0.XX.1;1 (Sta:Std.Ser.Acq;Img, i.e., other than the Series No. are fixed)). The file No. is updated, waiting foranother file Series No. By pressing [END], the load procedure starts with the following message.

Load Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0

** LOAD START** LOADED SERIES No.= XX** LOADED SERIES No.= XX

::

** XX Files loaded **


2242063


SYSTEM2–40

REV 0

2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Directory

1. To display the raw data file directory on the MOD, select 3 (DIRECTORY).

** RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY **

FILE# STUDY SER AQ HF STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME0 12345 01 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:561 12345 02 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:44:562 12345 03 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:54:56. .. .

Initialize

1. To initialize a MOD, select 4 (INITIALIZE). The volume name of the present MOD is displayed.

** MOD INITIALIZE (RAW DATA ONLY) **

Volume Name = XXXXInitialize OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> _

NoteThe MOD is initialized with volume name ‘ORAW’.


2242063


SYSTEM2–41

REV 0

2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

This program performs the same scan and data checks as the Warm–up scan sequence. The parameter rangesdescribed below are checked:

1. Enter 12 (Warm Up Error Analysis) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the (warm–up) scan parameter shown below:

*** WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS ***

–– AXIAL SCAN ––

SCAN TIME 4.5 secTHICKNESS 10 mmXG, ROTOR XG ONKV 120 kVMA 40 mACW/CCW CCWNO. OF SCAN 1

2. Press the guide lamps ([SET] and [START]) to perform the scan.

The results of data checks are shown as below:

REF CH. XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX (MIN=9000)XXXX XXXX (MAX=5000)

RATIO MAX X.XXXXX XXX chMIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.90)AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=1.10)

HIGHPASS MAX X.XXXXX XXX chMIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=–0.01)AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=+0.01)

S.D. MAX X.XXXXX XXX chMIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.00)AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=0.02)

The values in parentheses are the tolerances. If some channels give the same MAX or MIN values, the smallestchannel number is shown.

R1 ∼ 22

R23 ∼ 44


2242063


SYSTEM2–42

REV 0

2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS (continued)

3. You can examine each channel’s calculated data (Ratio, Highpass, and S.D.) displayed on the screen, and storethe data to a mean file. Select a type of calculated data you want to examine.

** KIND OF DATA ***

1. RATIO2. HIGHPASS3. S.D.

Select No.= 1

** DISPLAY/FILING**


Select No.= _

a. DISPLAY:

This selection shows each channel’s calculated data on the screen. Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.

Select No.= 1

Select CHANNEL No.(1) = _

Press [RTN] to see data of the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter achannel number, and that channel’s data is shown in the first line of the table, followed by data of the followingchannels. The number is parentheses is the default number.

CHANNEL RATIO0001 +0.9991 +0.9994 +1.0003 +0.99890005 +1.0001 +1.0000 +1.0000 +0.9991

0097 +1.0000 +1.0000 +1.0004 +1.00000101 +1.0001 +.09999 +1.0001 +1.0001

Select cHANNEL No.(105) = _

b. STORE FILE:

This selection stores the calculated data to a mean file. Enter a file No. (1 ∼ 16) and a comment (40 charactersmaximum).

Select No.= 2

** STORE FILE **

Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> = 1Enter COMMENT = WARM UP RATIO

** STORE END


2242063


SYSTEM2–43

REV 0

2-14 MTF SURVEY

The MTF SURVEY menu calculated MTF data from an image of a wire embedded in the QA phantom. In this menu,store the calculated data to a mean file, and analyze it using the Support Display.

Before entering this menu, scan a wire in the QA phantom, reconstruct using an appropriate algorithm you wish toexamine, view the image, and use ‘Report Cursor’ to note the wire center values.

1. Enter Image ID No.

** MTF SURVEY **

Enter IMAGE ID <XX:XXXXX.XX.XX;XX> = _

If there is not an image of the ID entered, the following message is displayed:

** IMAGE NOTHING

2. Enter the wire center values . The values should have been noted with using the ‘Report Cursor’ function.

WIRE CENTER X (Pixel)= _WIRE CENTER Y (Pixel)= _

3. Enter the area size (default: 32).

AREA SIZE <8/16/32/64/128 (pixel)> (32)= _

Use ‘Set Cursor’ to confirm that the designated area does not overlay phantom edges. If the entered value isnot to the second power, the following message appears.

** INVALID ENTRY

If the designated area (the center of it is the wire centers) cannot be contained within the image, the followingmessage appears.

** AREA TOO LARGE

4. Enter the edge width (for calculating CT# of water used for offset correction) (default: 4).

EDGE (Pixel) (4)= _

When the entered value is less than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.

** JUST A MOMENT PLEASE **

If the value is more than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.

** EDGE TOO LARGE **


2242063


SYSTEM2–44

REV 0

2-14 MTF SURVEY (continued)

5. Enter a graph type (default: 3).

SELECT GRAPH TYPE (1:STND/ 2:BONY/ 3:MANUAL)= _

When you select 1 (STND), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 8 LP/cm.When you select 2 (BONY), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 16 LP/cm.When you select 3 (MANUAL), enter a maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) (default: 12).

Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm)= _

6. Store the file to graphically view using Support Display.

** STORE FILE **

Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>= _Enter COMMENT = _

** START

** STORE END


2242063


SYSTEM3–1

REV 0

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM– SUPPORT DISPLY –

3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY

Use ‘SUPPORT DISPLAY’ to analyze raw data files or mean files created in Support programs by displaying the imag-es (these are not back–projected images, but ‘channel–view’ images) or graphs.

Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu to display the following screen:

Illustration 3–1 Support Display Screen

Channel

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL =1VIEW =1

RANGEMIN = 0MAX =1000

MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT

1. FILE SELECTION2. START POSITION3. RANGE4. ROI5. MAGNIFY6. PROFILE (H)7. PROFILE (V)8. HISTOGRAM9. NUMERICAL

10. WHERE11. SET CURSOR12. ERASE13. GRID14.15.

Select No. = 1Enter FILE NAME= SUPRAW1

View 512

View 1

Vie

w

Information

Menu

Message

Image Field(Channel–View Image)

Ch.1 Ch.512

The ‘Image filed’ (see illustration 3–1) comprises a 512 x 512 matrix. The horizontal axis in the image field indicateschannels, and the vertical axis indicates views, as shown. Since a raw data file contains data of beyond Ch.512 andView 512, the image filed can not show all the data of a raw data file. Use Start Position (2) to change the Channeland View start positions.


2242063


SYSTEM3–2

REV 0

3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)

A raw data file can be illustrated as below. A raw data file is a two–dimensional type file; a channel has data at eachview. Data is shown as a height of pillars in the illustration. On the other hand, a mean file is one–dimensional; a chan-nel has one data.

Illustration 3–2 Raw Data File and Mean File

RAW DATA FILE

Data

Channel View

Data

Channel

MEAN FILE


2242063


SYSTEM3–3

REV 0

3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)

The followings are the menus provided.

1. FILE SELECTION Choose one of four files (three raw data files plus one file that contains up to 16 mean files)created in Support programs.

2. START POSITION You may assign any channel No. and view No. to the Start Position location.(upper left corner of the image filed)

3. RANGE You can specify a range within the data range (–1000000 ∼ 1000000), and only the datafailing within this specified range are gray–shaded on the image field.

4. ROI Move the square cursor over a region of interest and the software calculates and displaysits Mean, S.D.(Standard Deviation), Maximum, and Minimum data.

5. MAGNIFY Position the cursor over region of interest and then select a Mag factor from x2 to x10 tomagnify the channel–view image area surrounding the cursor. Or, select a Reduction fac-tor from x1/2 to x1/10 to reduce the channel–view image; in this function you specify thechannel and view numbers for the upper left corner of the reduced image.

6. PROFILE (H) Position the cursor over a view of interest and software superimposes a graph of data ofeach channel over the image. The specifies Minimum and Maximum data values deter-mine axis graduation.

7. PROFILE (V) Position the cursor over a channel of interest and software superimposes a graph of dataat each view over the image. The specified Minimum And Maximum data values determineaxis graduation.

8. HISTOGRAM Position the square cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a histogramon the image. You can vary the histogram’s data range by changing the Minimum and Maxi-mum data values.

9. NUMERICAL Position the cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a numerical displayof the data for the cursor position and area surrounding it (9 locations in all) on the imagearea.

10. WHERE Displays the channel No. and view No. indicated by the cursor position.

11. SET CURSOR Enter a channel No. and view No. via the keyboard, and software moves the cursor to theposition on the image screen.

12. ERASE Erases any graphs, lines, or numeric data, produced by programs described above fromthe image.

13. GRID Software graduates the channel and view axes, or it also draws grid lines on the image fieldaccording to the graduations.


2242063


SYSTEM3–4

REV 0

3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY

1. Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu.

The ‘Support Display’ screen appears on the image monitor. The right side of the screen displays Support Displaymenus. Software automatically selects File Selection (1) when you first enter Support Display.

2. Press [Return] and enter the file name.Software refuses to accept any other menu selection until you select a file. After you enter the file name, youcan choose any of the following programs:

1. FILE SELECTION 2. START POSITION 3. RANGE 4. ROI 5. MAGNIFY 6. PROFILE (H) 7. PROFILE (V) 8. HISTOGRAM 9. NUMERICAL10. WHERE11. SET CURSOR12. ERASE13. GRID14.15.

Select No.= _

Note

� Press the [END] key to en the current program and make another selection from the menu.Press the [END] key at the menu level to end Support Display and return to the Maintenance menu.

� When you make an unacceptable entry, the following message appears:

** INVALID ENTRY

� The following message is displayed when a system error occurs. Software control shifts one level higher,waiting for a selection from the Display Support menu or the Maintenance menu.

** ERROR XXXXXXXX (ERROR CODE)

� If the entered parameters exceed the specified range, the following message is displayed, and softwarewaits for entry of appropriate parameters.

** RANGE ERROR


2242063


SYSTEM3–5

REV 0

3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)

General Procedure

(1) FILE SELECTION

(2) START POSITION(Defaults Channel No.:1, View No.:1)

(3) RANGE(Defaults MIN:0, MAX:1)

MEAN FILE DISPLAY RAW DATA FILE DISPLAY

(6) PROFILE (H) (9) NUMERICAL (10) WHERE (11) SET CURSOR (12) ERASE (13) GRID

(6) (7) PROFILE (H) (V) (4) ROI (5) MAGNIFY (8) HISTOGRAM (9) NUMERICAL (10) WHERE (11) SET CURSOR (12) ERASE (13) GRID

NOTE: First do the File Selection before using other Support Display function


2242063


SYSTEM3–6

REV 0

3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES

The following examples of images (channel–view images) show how raw data looks when the reconstructed imagesfrom these raw data files contain typical artifacts Ring, Shower, and Streak, respectively.

Ring Artifact

One channel consistently gives abnormal data at every view.

Illustration 3–3 Ring Artifact

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL =1VIEW =1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT





2242063


SYSTEM3–7

REV 0

3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES (continued)

Shower Artifact

Illustration 3–4 Shower Artifact

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL =1VIEW =1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT




Streak Artifact

One channel gives abnormal data at one view

Illustration 3–5 Streak Artifact

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL =1VIEW =1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT





2242063


SYSTEM3–8

REV 0

3-4 FILE SELECTION

1. Select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) from the ‘Display Support’ menu.

2. Enter a file name

Note

� For a file name, see the following ‘Files Viewed by Support Display’.

� If you enter a incorrect file name, the following message appears even though file exists:

** INVALID FILE

� If you enter the name of a non–existent file, the following message appears:

** FILE NOTHING

3. Enter MIN and MAX values for RANGE. The following screen appears.

The entered file name appears in the upper right corner of the screen (see illustration 3–6).If the system selects this menu automatically (immediately after you enter Support Display),then you must specify the data range; refer to Section 3-6, Range.

Illustration 3–6 File Selection

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL =1VIEW =1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 1Enter FILE NAME= SUPRAW1RANGE

MIN = 0MAX = 1000

Step 2Step 3


2242063


SYSTEM3–9

REV 0

3-4 FILE SELECTION (continued)

Illustration 3–7 Creation of Mean and Raw Data Files

Support Display

Maintenance

Support

Off–Line Scan

Statistics

FAN

Original

Mean File Directory Raw Data File Directory

Max, Min,Mean S.D.

Offset Average

Calculation with Raw Data

Original Max, Min,Mean S.D.

Calculation with Mean File

Maintenance

Mean File No. File ID No.

Mean FileNo.

Mean File No.

Mean File No.

Raw Data File No.

Raw Data File No.

Mean File No.


2242063


SYSTEM3–10

REV 0

3-4 FILE SELECTION (continued)

Support Display can be used for any raw data files listed in RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY (Support program) or anyfiles stored in OFF LINE SCAN; For this, these raw data files should be stored in STATISTICS. In sTATISTICS, a rawdata file can be shored to any of No. 1 ∼ 3.Support Display can also be used for any mean files listed in MEAN FILE DIRECTORY, or stored in STATISTICS,CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE, OR CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA.

For example of storing a raw data file;

a. Enter the STATISTICS program.

b. Select ORIGINAL in the FAN menu.

c. Store the raw data file to any of No. 1 ∼ 3

In Support Display, use the following file names for FILE SELECTION.All the mean files are stored in a file named SUPMEAN, since a mean file only takes storage space for one view.

File Name Raw Data File & Mean File

SUPRAW 1 Raw Data File No.1



SUPMEAN View 1 Mean File 1View 2 Mean File 2

View 16 Mean File 16

NoteYou can shorten the file names as below:

SUPRAW 1 R1SUPRAW 2 R2SUPRAW 3 R3SUPMEAN M


2242063


SYSTEM3–11

REV 0

3-5 START POSITION

The upper left corner of the image filed is the location for the first channel No. and view No. (start position) of thedisplayed image. By default, Channel 1 and View 1 are assigned to the start position, but a different start positionchannel and/or view can be entered using this menu.

1. Select 2 (START POSITION).

2. Enter the channel No. and view No. as a start position.The entered parameters are displayed in the upper right corner of the CRT.

Note

� The following inquiry appears for a raw data file:

CHANNEL =VIEW =

� The following appears for the SUPMEAN file. Enter 1 ∼ 16 for DATA. (The SUPMEAN file contains 16mean files in View 1 ∼ 16.)

CHANNEL =VIEW =

Illustration 3–8 Start Position

Displayed ItemsDefault:Ch1

View1

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 250VIEW = 10


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 2CHANNEL = 250VIEW = 10

Step 1Step 2

Start PositionChannel

View


2242063


SYSTEM3–12

REV 0

3-6 RANGE

Data at each point on the image filed are depicted as shades of gray. The data range of a raw data file is between–1000000 and 1000000, and a specified range within the data range translates into between –1000 and 3000 graylevels, which are then displayed on the image field; that is , after you specify the MIN and MAC values, the specifiedrange is expanded (or reduced) to the –1000 ∼ 3000 range. See illustration 3–9.

Illustration 3–9 Range and Gray Level

MAXMINÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ

–1000000 1000000

–1000 3000

RAW DATA

GRAY LEVEL

1. Select 3 (RANGE).

2. Enter MIN and MAX values. The following screen appears.

NoteSoftware accepts any MIN and MAX values between –1000000 to +1000000, as long as the MINvalue is less than the MAX value. The MIN and MAX values are displayed in the upper right quadrantof the screen. For example, enter MIN = 0 and MAX = 1000.Because the default range is relatively narrow and the levels are low, the typical image has offsetviews like illustration 3–10, with the rest of the image being (evenly) bright white.

Illustration 3–10 Range

OffsetView

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START



MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 3MIN = 0MAX = 1000

Step 1Step 2


2242063


SYSTEM3–13

REV 0

3-7 ROI

Use this menu to calculate the statistical information of an area enclosed by a square cursor.

1. Display the square cursor on the screen by pressing the [Crsr] key and [�/�] key. Use the trackball to size andposition the cursor over a region of interest.

NotePosition first the cursor before commanding ROI and also do not position the cursor out of range.otherwise, the following message appears.

** INVALID CURSOR

2. Select menu 4 (ROI).The software calculates and displays the statistical data (MEAN, S.D., MAX, AND MIN) in the lower right quad-rant of the image field.The cursor’s size and position are displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.

Illustration 3–1 1 ROI

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR

CHANNEL = 260VIEW = 292SIZE X = 52SIZE Y = 42

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 4 Step 1

Step 2

MEAN : 6.034418E + 02S.D. : 2.436565E + 01MAX : 6.635000E + 02MIN : 5.385000E + 02

Displayed Items


2242063


SYSTEM3–14

REV 0

3-8 MAGNIFY

Use this menu to magnify the image up to 10 times (x1 to x10).

1. Position the crosshair over a region of interest.

NotePosition first the cursor before commanding MAGNIFY and also do not position the cursor out ofrange, otherwise, the following message appears.

** INVALID CURSOR

2. Select 5 (MAGNIFY) to enlarge the area surrounding the + cursor.

Illustration 3–12 Magnify

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 2

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 5MAG <1–10>

</2 – /10> =2

Step 2

Step 1

Step 3


2242063


SYSTEM3–15

REV 0

3-8 MAGNIFY (continued)

3. Enter a magnification factor.The magnification factor is displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.

Note

� You can also reduce the image within the range of x1/2 to x1/10 to view the entire image. If you reducethe image by a 1/8 factor, foe example, enter:

/8 [RTN]

Then specify the channel N0. and view No. which determines the position of the upper left corner of thereduced image. The channel No. and view No. selectable depend on the reduction factor. If you selected1/8 for the reduction factor, for example, then the following range is shown:

SAMPLING ORIGINCHANNEL <1–8>= _VIEW <1–8>= _

You can reduce a mean file only in the horizontal direction.

� You can only magnify an image once (You cannot magnify an already magnified image).

4. To return to normal size display, select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) or specify a magnification factor of 1; youdo not need a cursor for either execution.


2242063


SYSTEM3–16

REV 0

3-9 PROFILE (H)

Use this menu to display a graph of data of channels at a specified view. If a channel gave abnormal data during ascan, the graph will show a significant deviation at this channel. Use this menu to track down ring artifacts.

1. Position the cursor over a view of interest using the trackball (the horizontal position (channel) is irrelevant).

NotePosition first the cursor before commanding PROFILE (H) and also do not position the cursor out ofrange, otherwise, the following message appears.

** INVALID CURSOR

2. Select menu item 6 (PROFILE H).

3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot.(Data out of this range is not plotted.See illustration 3–13)Software displays the specified MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display Support menu.

Illustration 3–13 Data Range for Profile (H)

MAX.ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙMIN.

Data

Channel


2242063


SYSTEM3–17

REV 0

3-9 PROFILE (H) (continued)

4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to displaya more descriptive curve in the following way:

a. Press the [End] key to end the Profile program.

b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.

c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.

5. Change the ‘START POSITION’ to draw a graph for other channels, since the program only graphs 512 channelat a time

Illustration 3–14 Profile (H)

Ran

ge

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR


DATA MIN0.000000e + 00

DATA MAX1.000000e + 04

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 6DATAMIN= 0.000000e + 00DATA MAX= 1000 �

Step 2

Step 1

Channel

Step 3,4

Step 5

View 92 is selected.


2242063


SYSTEM3–18

REV 0

3-10 PROFILE (V)

Use this menu to display a graph of data of a specified channel. If a channel gave abnormal data during one or moreviews, the graph will show a significant deviation at these views. Use this menu to troubleshoot streak artifacts.

1. Position the cursor over a channel of interest using the trackball (the vertical position (view) is irrelevant).

NotePosition first the cursor before commanding PROFILE(V) and also do not position the cursor out ofrange, otherwise, the following message appears.

** INVALID CURSOR

2. Select menu item 7 (PROFILE V).

3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot. (Data out of this range is not plotted.See illustration 3–15)Software displays the specifies MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display support menu.

Illustration 3–15 Data Range for Profile (V)

MAX.ÙÙÙÙÙÙMIN.

Data

View


2242063


SYSTEM3–19

REV 0

3-10 PROFILE (V) (continued)

4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to displaya more descriptive curve in the following manner.

a. Press the [End] key to en the Profile program.

b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.

c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.

5. Change the START POSITION (2) to draw a graph for other views, since the program only graphs 512 viewsat a time.

Illustration 3–16 Profile (V)

Vie

w

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR


DATA MIN4.000000e + 02

DATA MAX8.000000e + 04

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 7DATAMIN= 4.000000e + 02DATA MAX= 800 �

Step 2

Step 1

Range

Step 3,4

Step 5

Channel 433 isselected.


2242063


SYSTEM3–20

REV 0

3-11 HISTOGRAM

This program draws a histogram on an area enclosed by the box cursor. The histogram shows a frequency distributionof data within your specified MIN and MAX range.

1. Position the box cursor over an area of interest using the trackball.

NotePosition first the cursor before commanding HISTOGRAM and also do not position the cursor outof range, otherwise, the following message appears.

** INVALID CURSOR

2. Change the box size using the [Size] key.

3. Select menu item 8 (HISTOGRAM).

4. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the data range for the histogram.The histogram is drawn automatically. The size and the center location of the square cursor are displayed inthe upper right quadrant of the screen. (The box cursor remains on the image field.)

Illustration 3–17 Histogram

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR

CHANNEL = 426VIEW = 425SIZE X = 52SIZE Y = 42

DATA MIN4.000000e + 02

DATA MAX8.000000e + 04

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 8MIN= 4.000000e + 02MAX= 800 �

Step 3

Step 1,2

Range

Step 4


2242063


SYSTEM3–21

REV 0

3-12 NUMERICAL

This menu numerically displays data of a location of the cursor and its surrounding locations (nine locations in all) asillustrated below. This function may be used to determine proper MIN and MAX values for Profile(H) and Profile(V).

Cursor Position

This menu automatically clears the image filed (but leaves the image) before displaying the numerical values, andhighlights the center position.

1. Position the cursor over a location of interest using the trackball.

2. select menu item 9 (NUMERICAL).The cursor location (Channel No. and View No.) is displayed above the display Support menu.

Illustration 3–18 Numerical

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR


DISPLAY SUPPORT




Step 1

6.639999e+02 6.644999e+02 6.710000e+02

6.605000e+02 6.630000e+02 6.695000e+02

6.675000e+02 6.590000e+02 6.755000e+02

NoteIf you fail to correctly position the cursor, the following message appears:

** INVALID CURSOR


2242063


SYSTEM3–22

REV 0

3-13 WHERE

This menu displays the location information (Channel No. and view No.) of the cursor which you position.

1. Position the cursor.

2. Select menu item 10 (WHERE).The channel No. and view No. of the cursor location are displayed above the Display Support menu.

Illustration 3–19 Where

Displayed Items

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1CURSOR


DISPLAY SUPPORT




Step 1

NoteIf you fail to correctly position the cursor the following message appears:

** INVALID CURSOR


2242063


SYSTEM3–23

REV 0

3-14 SET CURSOR

This menu sets the cursor to the specified location (View No. and Channel No. or Data No.).

1. Enter 11 (SET CURSOR).

2. Enter the channel No. and view No. (or data No.) where you want to display the cursor.The cursor will be displayed at the location.

NoteFor a raw data file, enter the following: CHANNEL = VIEW =For a mean file, enter the following (enter 1∼16 for Data, which corresponds to mean file No.1∼16: CHANNEL =

VIEW =

Illustration 3–20 Set Cursor

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 11CHANNEL = 350VIEW = 100

Step 1

DisplayedCursor

Step 2


2242063


SYSTEM3–24

REV 0

3-15 ERASE

This menu removes graphs, numeric data, or histograms superimposed on the image. Normally, the graphics remainuntil a new function clears them, or replaces them with other graphics, or you select ERASE. This menu does not erasethe cursor.

1. select menu item 12 (ERASE).


2242063


SYSTEM3–25

REV 0

3-16 GRID

This menu graduates the channel and view axes and/or draws grid lines according to the graduations on the imagefiled.

NoteWhen displaying the different grid of graduations, first erase the displayed grid using the erase func-tion (menu item 12), then perform the following. If not erased, a new grid is superimposed on the oldone.

1. Select menu item 13 (GRID).

2. Enter the graduations for CHANNEL and VIEW axes.

NoteFor a raw data file, enter both channel and view graduations.for a mean file, enter only channel graduation.

If the values below are entered, for example, both axes will be graduated at intervals of 50 values.(If you magnify the image so that multiple pixels depict each channel and view, the program uses thecenter pixel.)



2242063


SYSTEM3–26

REV 0

3-16 GRID (continued)

3. Select Grid Type or Axis Type; see below.

Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to LINE?, if displaying grid type of graduation.Select ‘1:No’ in response to LINE?, if displaying axis type of graduation.

Grid Type(Line? 0:Yes)

Axis Type(Line? 1:No)

NoteThe graduations start from Channel = 0, View = 0.Therefor, if the start position is set to Channel = 101, View = 101 and the graduations are set to Chan-nel = 50, View = 50, for example, the graduations are displayed from Channel = 150, View = 150.

Illustration 3–21 Grid

FILE:SUPRAW1START

CHANNEL = 1VIEW = 1


MAGNIFY = 1

DISPLAY SUPPORT



Select No. = 13CHANNEL = 50VIEW = 50LINE? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0

Step 1

DisplayedGrid

Step 2Step 3


2242063


SYSTEM4–1

REV 0

SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM– OTHERS –

4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRA TION

This program makes a calibration file from raw data files acquired in off–line or on–line scans. You need the followingraw data: AIR DATA and PHANTOM DATA

Note

� This program changes the existing calibration file. Save these files to a floppy diskette before you startthis program.

� Gather all the raw data used to make the calibration file under the same conditions, on the same system.

� Perform the air calibration (Off–Line) prior to performing the phantom calibration (Off–Line).

� To terminate this program during execution, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Maintenance menu.


2242063


SYSTEM4–2

REV 0

4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION (continued)

1. Select 3 (OFF–LINE CALIBRATION).

2. An example is shown below:

** OFF–LINE CALIBRATION **

–– RAW DATA FILE MENU ––

AIR (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.1;1 ‘CR’AIR (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.2;1 ‘CR’

PHANTOM (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.3;1 ‘CR’PHANTOM (CCW) ID No.= 00:1.1.4;1 ‘CR’

PRESS <END> AFTER ENTRY

–– AIR (CW) ––

<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>

(FOV 25 cm) (FOV 35 cm) (FOV 42 cm)TH TH TH

1. 10 mm 5. 10 mm 9. 10 mm2. 5 mm 6. 5 mm 10. 5 mm3. 3 mm 7. 3 mm 11. 3 mm4. 1 mm 8. 1 mm 12. 1 mm

<xx><xx–yy>

Select No.<xx,yy,zz> = 1–4 ‘CR’ (Select the CAL files 1, 2, 3, and 4)

NoteIf incorrect inputs were made, one of the following messages is displayed:

** INVALID ENTRY** INVALID RAW DATA (SCOUT)** RAW DATA NOTHING** INVALID SCAN ROTATION

The selected CAL files will be changed.


2242063


SYSTEM4–3

REV 0

4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT

‘CT Number Adjustment’ means to change a part of the CAL files with conversion coefficients called β and γ so thatwater and air images have CT Numbers 0 and –1000, respectively. The coefficients β and γ are calculated fromscanned images of water and air.

See ‘CT Number Adjustment’, of system of the Functional Check / Adjustment manual, for details.


2242063


SYSTEM4–4

REV 0

4-3 POST RECON

This program reconstructs an image from the specified raw data on the hard disk.

1. Select 7 (POST RECON).

2. An example is shown below:

** POST RECON **

(DEFAULT=00:00000.02.01;01)enter Raw data ID No.= 0.1.1 ‘CR’ Enter Raw Data ID No. (Study#.Ser#.Acq#) to be

reconstructed

STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME0000 03 01 H CW 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 40 1992/07/01 12:34:56

– – SCAN & RECON PARAMETER – –

NO. OF IMAGE = 1RECON MODE = STNDRECON CENTER–X = 0.0 (mm)RECON CENTER–Y = 0.0 (mm)RECON FOV = 25.0 (cm)MOTION CORRECTION = ONWINDOW WIDTH = 500WINDOW LEVEL = 40ENHANCE = OFFHF/FF = HORIENTATION = SPANATOMY = HEADSCAN FOV = 25.0 (cm)THICKNESS = 10.0 (mm)KV = 120 (kV)

Parameter OK ? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’ Change Scan & Recon Parameters if necessary .

(DEFAULT=00000.01.01;01)Enter Image ID No.= 0.1.1;2 ‘CR’ Enter image ID No.(Study#.Ser#.Acq#;Image#)

NoteThe image ID No. must be a new number. When the image No. already exists, Post Recon can notproceed.

During Post Reconstruction, ‘Que xx(xx)’ is displayed on the upper corner of the touch panel.

3. Press [END] key to exit.

4. To display the reconstructed image, enter the image ID No. in the Patient List Menu.

NoteWhen ‘Auto View’ function is set to ON (the indication ‘V’ is displayed on the lower right corner of theimage area), the image will be automatically displayed after Post Recon is executed.


2242063


SYSTEM4–5

REV 0

4-4 MT RECOVERY

This menu recovers MT images which can not be retrieved due to a tape Parity Error or corrupted directory. This pro-gram only copies MT images to the disk. To store the images back on a magnetic tape, enter Image File Managementafter finishing the MT Recovery.

Select 7 (MT RECOVERY).

*** MT RECOVERY ***

1. PARITY MT RECOVERY2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY

1. PARITY MT RECOVERY:

This menu recovers tapes with corrupted MT directories.

a. Select 1 (PARITY MT RECOVERY).The recovery procedure is started.

Select No.= 1 ‘CR’

RECOVERED IMAGE ID = 00:00009.01.05:01RECOVERED IMAGE ID = 00:00009.01.05:02

:

2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY:

Use this menu to recover an incorrectly initialized tape or the images stored after mis–initialization occurred.In the later case, not all the images can be recovered since Image files in the first part of MT might have beendestroyed.

a. Select 2 (MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY).The recovery procedure is started.



:


2242063


SYSTEM4–6

REV 0

4-4 MT RECOVERY (continued)

3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY:

This menu lets you select the images to recover.

a. Select 3 (FILE NO. ENTRY RECOVERY).

b. Input File No. to recover.


File No. 7 <XXX–XXX> 17–18 ‘CR’ File No.: file serial No. from the head of T ape.


TOTAL RECOVERY IMAGE No.= 002

File No. Input Format:

i. File No. XXX to be recovered:

File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX ‘CR’

ii. File No. 0 ∼ XXX to be recovered:

File No.? <XXX–XXX> –XXX ‘CR’

iii. File No. XXX ∼ Last file to be recovered:

File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX– ‘CR’

iv. File No. XXX ∼ YYY to be recovered:

File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX–YYY ‘CR’

v. File No. 0 ∼ Last file to be recovered:

File No.? <XXX–XXX> – ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM4–7

REV 0

4-5 OD SWEEPER

Use this menu when the system displays the following messages:

ER–440 OD Study inf. NothingER–441 OD Image inf. NothingER–442 OD Study inf. Incorrect

You nay see these messages when someone turned OFF the system during OD operation. In this case, certain ODinformation may be corrupted. The OD sweeper function tries to recover the oD from the inadvertent shut–down.

Note

� The OD sweeper function continues processing data, even if system errors occur; the OD SWEEPER triesto recover as much data as possible.

� It is impossible to manage OD information while OD SWEEPER is operating.

� It is impossible to dismount the OD cartridge while OD SWEEPER is operating.

1. Select 8 (OD SWEEPER).OD SWEEPER program starts and displays the following messages. OD information might be recovered auto-matically.

** OD COHERENCE CHECK START **

** STUDY INF DELETE xx:xxxx** IMAGE INF DELETE xx:xxxx,xx.xx;xx** FILE DELETE $DMP:0. WRXXXXX.IXXXXX.VR** STUDY INF REPAIR XX:XXXXX

** OD COHERENCE CHECK END **


2242063


SYSTEM4–8

REV 0

4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY

This menu can be used for restoring the Study Information destroyed by a power–down during storing images ontothe optical disk. (However, not all information can be recovered.)Hospital Name, Patient ID and Patient Personal Data need to be entered to rebuild the Study Information.

Note

� If the original images still exist on the hard disk, it’s the best way to store the images onto the optical diskagain after running the ‘OD SWEEPER’ menu.

� If the maximum number of images or acquisitions in one Study on the OD is larger than that of the system,this recovery function can not be performed.

1. Insert the optical disk cartridge to be recovered into the drive.

2. Select 9 (OD STUDY RECOVERY).First, the program checks the OD to be recovered.

NoteIf there happens to be any problem, the following message will be displayed.

� ** OD NOT READY **OD status is ‘Off–line’ or ‘On mounting’. After checking that it is ‘Mounted’ on the status display, retry.

� ** ILLEGAL OD **OD is not the system OD or the scratch OD which can be recognized on this system.

� ** PROTECTED OD **OD is protected. After removing a protect label, retry.

Then the Model No. (lower 2 digits), the Machine No. and the Study No. of the Study to be recovered is displayed.

3. Enter the complete model number (4 digits) by referring to the displayed Model No. list.

** OD STUDY RECOVERY **

Model : **0CMachine : 1234

Study : 00053

Enter Full Model No. (4Digit) = 010C ‘CR’

Model No. : Model Name0101 : CT 86000102 : CT 8800

.

.


2242063


SYSTEM4–9

REV 0

4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY (continued)

4. It displays the specified Study Information. See below.Enter the data into the blank column.

NoteSome columns have been recovered automatically by referring to the Image information. They canalso be modified. However, it is not recommended to change the Study Number, Number of Imagesand Scan Date.

5. After completing the Study Information, press the [End] key.

Study Information

Station:Study = 00:00053Number of Images = 017Enhance = NO C

Scan Date = 1989/10/31Patient ID = 0425855150Patient Name = MichaelPatient Birthday = 1962/02/05Patient Sex = MPatient Age = 27;08Patient Weight = 55.0Model Name = Ct SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIESHospital Name = HINO HOSPITAL

OK to Recovery ? <1:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’

6. Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to ‘OK to Recovery ?’/The OD study recovery is started and it takes several minutes finish.

NoteIf there happens to be any problem or interruption, the following message will be displayed.

� ** STUDY INF. FULL **Study Information Area on OD is full. The study can not be recovered any longer.

� ** OD STUDY RECOVERY ERROR END **Any error occurs during the recovery operation.

� ** OD STUDY RECOVERY CANCELLED ** The CANCEL key is pressed during the recovery operation to cancel.

7. If there is any other Study to be recovered on the same OD, it will return to step 3.

8. When all Studies have been recovered, it will finish with the following message.

**OD STUDY RECOVERY END **

9. Now the OD is ‘Off–line’. Therefore, eject the cartridge once and re–insert it to the drive to read out images fromthe recovered OD.


2242063


SYSTEM4–10

REV 0

4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

This function sets the parameter that simulates the temperature of the x–ray tube anode and its case to the maximumvalue allowed.During (off–line) manual exposures, the service person should wait the recommended minimum time between expo-sures. The CPU keeps a running tally of manual exposures, but does not calculate or impose any delays, nor doesit measure the actual heat generated in the x–ray tube. Use this TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE function after performing off–line exposures if sufficient cooling time for the nextscans is desired.

1. Select 10 (TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE).

2. Select 0 (Yes) to set the Anode and Case Temperature to the maximum value.

** TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE **

This program will set the anode and Case Temperature Maximum.OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM4–11

REV 0

4-8 SERVICE MODE

This menu can be used to set/reset a flag for special service purposes. Currently it sets the following:

� ROI value display

– display to on decimal place (flag: OFF)

– display to two decimal places (flag: ON)

1. Select 11 (SERVICE MODE).

2. Enter 1 to set a flag or enter 0 to reset a flag.

** SERVICE MODE **

Service Mode = 0 <0:OFF, 1:ON>New Data =


2242063


SYSTEM4–12

REV 0

4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

This menu stores the system parameters to a floppy disk or loads them from the floppy disk to the hard disk. Thesystem had the following parameters:

Station Number InformationPatients InformationSeries DescriptionScan Parameters

NoteWhen loading system parameters to the hard disk, be sure that the parameters on the floppy diskare of the same system, since the system parameters are unique to each system.

Select 12 (SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD).

*** SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD ***

1. Parameter Dump to FD2. Parameter Load from FD0. End

Select No.= _

1. Parameter Dump to FD

a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:

** INSERT ‘BOOT’ FDPress <ENTR> to Continue

If you want to Change the FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOt floppy and inset a floppy disk for dump.)

Press <ENTR> to Continue

2. Parameter Load from FD

a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:

** INSERT ‘BOOT’ FDPress <ENTR> to Continue

If you want to Change the FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOT floppy and inset the floppy disk containing the system parameters.)

Press <ENTR> to Continue


2242063


SYSTEM5–1

REV 0

SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM– CLASS C SOFTWARE –

5-1 INTRODUCTION

In addition to the Maintenance programs which are described in Section 2 through 4, the following class C programsare provided by class C software disks.

� Class C Service Tools

� Error Message Help

� Heat Soak

Table 5–1 shows the part Nos. of Class C Software disks for Error Message Help (volume name:EH00) and ClassC Service Tools (volume name:SV00) to be used according to product.

Table 5–1 Part No. of Class C Software (EH00 & SV00)

Product Part No. of SV00 Part No. of EH00

CT Sytec/Sytec i series 2131964 P9190RC


2242063


SYSTEM5–2

REV 0

5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS

The class C service tools contain the following:

� Enhanced Alignment

� Automated CT Number Adjustment

� Automated Post Recon

The volume name of the floppy disk containing the above all is ‘SV00’.

5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software

NoteIn the Installation or Delete procedure described below, a message “FHS ERROR C2” will be gener-ated after inputting “IC”, or at the end of procedure. Ignore this message.

Installation (Registration to Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Service Tool software, if the software has been deleted.Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a systemsoftware version–up or reloading procedure.

1. Enter the <Management> menu by pressing the [Mgt] key.

2. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.

3. Enter $$ and the following prompt will be displayed:

>

4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk, and insert the SV00 disk.

5. Enter the following at the > prompt (‘CR’ means [Enter]):

>FN SV00:0.&.SV00INST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM5–3

REV 0

5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS (continued)

5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software (continued)

Delete (from Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following, if necessary, after using the software (this may be required so that only service engineers own-ing this class C floppy disk can use this software):




>

4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the SV00 disk.


>FN SV00:0.&.SV00DEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM5–4

REV 0


5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment

ENHANCED ALIGNMENT is a program for performing the adjustment of the following:

� Iso Center Alignment

� Filter Center Alignment

This program allows simpler procedures. The fileld engineer repeats scans and adjustments according to the instruc-tions displayed on the CRT monitor intil the specifications are met, as illustrated below:

Start

Scan(s)

Within Specifications?

END

Adjustment

Yes

No


2242063


SYSTEM5–5

REV 0


5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment (continued)

Operation

Select <Enhanced Alignment> from the Maintenance menu.

** ENHANCED ALIGNMENT ***

– – ALIGNMENT MENU – –

1. TUBE ALIGNMENT2. BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT

Select No.= _

1. TUBE ALIGNMENT:

a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.

b. Select TUBE ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced Alignment menu.

c. Perform air axial scans, according to the instructions displayed.

d. Perform axial scans on a pin, according to the instructions displayed.In this step a pin (a screw driver, etc.) is to be placed on the scan plane.

e. Adjust the x–ray tube alignment, according to the instructions.

2. BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT:

a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.

b. Select BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced alignment menu.

c. Perform an air axial scan without bow–tie filter, according to the instructions displayed.

d. Perform an air axial scan with bow–tie filter, according to the instructions displayed.

e. adjust the filter alignment, according to the instructions.


2242063


SYSTEM5–6

REV 0


5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment

As shown below, almost all of CT No. adjustment steps are automatically performed by this program. The scans areperformed only using the 25cm FOV (the minimum one); however, the CT No. adjustment is performed for all theFOVs.

Automatic

Water Phantom Centering

Enter <Automated CT Number Adjustment>

Raw and Image Data Space Check, Recon Queue Check

Scans

CT No. Measurement of ROIs

Calculations (β and γ)

Cal File Modification

CT No. Verification

1. Attach the phantom holder to the end of the cradle, and set the 25cm water phantom to the phantom holder.

2. Move the cradle to center the phantom on the scan plane, and press the ‘Zero’ button tn the Gantry Control Panel.

3. Select <Automated CT No. Adjustment > from the Maintenance menu.

Data Space Check and Recon Queue CheckAt first, the program reserves data spaces for raw data files and image files, and then checks if raw data filesexist in recon queue. If required data spaces can not be reserved, or data exists in recon queue, this programcan not proceed.


2242063


SYSTEM5–7

REV 0


5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment (continued)

4. Perform scans.First, water phantom scans are performed, and then air scans are performed after the cradle is automaticallymoved (100mm away from the Gantry).

The following scan parameters are used for scans.

Water Phantom Scans

mA (mA) Scan Time (sec)

FOV (cm) Thickness(mm)

KV (kV)CT Sytec

Plus3000i4000i

CT SytecS

2000i

CT SytecPlus3000i4000i

CT SytecS

2000i

10 120 100 80

5 120 100 80

25 3 120 160 130 2.7 3.6

2 120 160 130

1 120 160 160

Air Scans

Scan Time (sec)

FOV (cm) Thickness(mm)

KV (kV) mA (mA)CT Sytec

Plus3000i4000i

CT SytecS

2000i

10

5

25 3 120 40 2.7 3.6

2

1

CT No. CalculationCalculated CT Number are displayed one by one on the CRT monitor. The NEW CT Numbers are calculatedusing the modifies CAL files, and the OLD CT Numbers are calculated using the old ones.

5. Verify that the NEW CT Numbers are normal (Air: –1000±5, Water: 0±3).


2242063


SYSTEM5–8

REV 0


5-2-4 Automated Post Recon

This program automatically tests the operation of post reconstruction a number of times.First, select a raw data file on which post recon test is performed.and then, input the image ID which is correctly reconstructed from the raw data file (called reference image).Recon operation on the selected raw data files is performed and then the resulted image is compared with the refer-ence image to check if they are identical. IF not identical, the reconstructed image is stored (called error image).This check repeats the number of times specified (up to 10000) or until 10 (maximum) error images are stored, asillustrated below.

Yes

Start

Input or Raw Data (=A)

Input of Reference Image (=B)

Recon ON ‘A’ (=C)

B = C ? Store of ‘C’

All Tests Finished ?

END

No

Yes

No


2242063


SYSTEM5–9

REV 0


5-2-4 Automated Post Recon (continued)

1. Select <Automated Post Recon Test> from the Maintenance menu.

Number of Error ImagesAt first, the program reserves data space for storing error images. The number of image spaces is usually 10maximum.

2. Enter the Raw data ID.

Scan and Recon Parameter displayAfter the raw data ID is properly input, the scan and recon parameters on the raw data are displayed.

3. Change the Scan and Recon Parameters, if required. Normally for this <Automated Post Recon Test>, do notchange the parameters.

4. Enter the reference image ID.

5. Enter the number of tests to be repeated (iteration). The maximum number is 10000.

6. Press the [Enter] key to start the test.


2242063


SYSTEM5–10

REV 0

5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP

When a system error occurs, the error message information only consists of the error name, error number, and otherlimited information. The message does not include detailed information on the error (Contents) or items which canbe done for troubleshooting (Action). this ERROR MESSAGE HELP provides these Contents and appropriate Actionon the display screen. This function is available from the service maintenance menu, after installing the ERROR MES-SAGE HELP disk (Volume name: EH00) to the system.




Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Error Message Help, if the software has been deleted.Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a systemsoftware version–up or reloading procedure.




>

4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.


>FN EH00:0.&.EHINST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM5–11

REV 0

5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP (continued)


Delete (from Maintenance Menu)





>

4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.


>FN EH00:0.&.EHDEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’


2242063


SYSTEM5–12

REV 0


5-3-2 Operation

1. Select Error Message Help from the Maintenance menu.

The screen should appear as shown below.The Error Message screen consists of three areas: Window–1, Window–2, and Window–3. In Window–1, a listof errors are shown which are also displayed on the Status screen.

** ERROR HELP **

(Window–1) ↑∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX ∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX

∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX

↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ (Error Number) (Time) (Error Name) (System Error) (Logical CPU) (Task) ↓

(Window–2) ↑

Contents= ↑

(Details)

Action = ↑

(Remedy) ↓↑

�/ �:Up/Down ERR_NO= SYSTEM ERROR CODE= MSG_NO= ↑ ↑

(Error Number) (Message Number) �/ �:Change Entry Mode Press <END> to End (Window–3) ↓


2242063


SYSTEM5–13

REV 0


5-3-2 Operation (continued)

Displaying Error Information

Three ways of displaying error information are provided, as described below:

� Displaying error information from the ST ATUS screen;

Move the cursor to the error row that you want to know about using the �/� keys in Window–1.Then, press the Return key.

The error message information (Contents and Action) is displayed in Window–2. The selected error ishighlighted.

When there is not enough room in Window–2 to display the complete information for the error message,select either Contents or Action using the Shift + �/� keys, and then the Window–2 area can be scrolledusing the �/� keys.

� Displaying error information from both Error No. and System Error code;

Move the cursor in Window–3 to ERR_NO= using the �/� keys, and enter the error number (three digits).Then move the cursor to SYSTEM ERROR CODE= using the �/� keys, and enter the system error code(eight digits). The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window–2.

� Displaying error information from a Message No.;

Move the cursor in Window–2 to MSG_NO= using the �/� keys. Then, enter the message number.The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window–2.

Return to Service Maintenance Menu

Return to the service Maintenance menu by pressing the END key.


2242063


SYSTEM5–14

REV 0

5-4 HEAT SOAK

This program can be used for a heat soak procedure when the x–ray tube is replaced, after performing the <TubeCalibration> procedure. The Heat Soak function is provided on a floppy disk whose volume name is ‘HTS0’ or ‘HTS1’.




Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Heat Soak, if the software has been deleted. Usually, thesoftware is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system software ver-sion–up or reloading procedure.




>

4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.


>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0INST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’

6. Remove the floppy disk.


2242063


SYSTEM5–15

REV 0

5-4 HEAT SOAK (continued)


Delete (from Maintenance menu)





>

4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.


>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0DEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’

>RT ‘CR’

6. Remove the floppy disk.

5-4-2 Operation

The x–ray tube should be sufficiently cool; Anode/Case Heat should be at 0%.

1. Set the 42cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.

2. Move the cradle to a position where the phantom is just over the Detector window, using the positioning lights.

NoteThis is to reduce x–ray dose to the detector during the heat soak procedure to protect it.

3. Select <Heat Soak> from the Support menu.

4. Perform scans, according to the instructions displayed.

NoteDo not perform a warm–up or scans for at least ten minutes after completing this Heat Soak proce-dure.


2242063


SYSTEM5–16

blank


2242063


SYSTEM6–1

REV 0

SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS

6-1 INTRODUCTION

Display of Message

Any unusual occurrence in the system is reported to the OC Message screen. When an error occurs during normaloperation, the console [Status] key LED flashes and a ‘beep’ tone sounds. Press the [Status] key to view the Messagescreen. The flashing LED stays steadily lit while the Message screen displays. The most recent error is listed last onthe screen. Press [Status] a second time to return to the normal display screen. (The LED turns OFF until the nesterror starts it flashing –or– you press the [Status] key.)

You can press the [Status] key at any time to view the message screen. The LED stays lit until you press [Status]a second time to toggle back to the normal display screen.

The system can store 80 lines of error messages.

Format for Message Display

*** ERR–XXX HH:MM Message (32 CHARACTERS) LCP=XX TM=XXX ADD=XXXXXXXX

*1 *2 *3 *5 *6 *7

Data (56 CHARACTERS)

*4

*** MS–XXX HH:MM Message (32 CHARACTERS)

*1 *2 *3

Data (56 CHARACTERS)

*4

*1) Error (Message) No.

*2) The time of Error (Message) generation.(time:minute)(The actual time the Error (Message) is displayed on the screen.)

*3) Caption Message. Brief explanation of the Error (Message) No.

*4) Data (Error Code, etc.)

*5) Logical CPU No. of CPU which received the Error information.LCP No. 1 = FMP (File Processor)

3 = DMP (Scan/Display Processor)

*6) Task mane associated with the Error.

*7) Address that generated the Error.


2242063


SYSTEM6–2

REV 0

6-1 INTRODUCTION (continued)

Message No. Groups

000 ∼ 099 Common Errors (TRAP Error, common function, etc.). . . .

100 ∼ 199 Scan. . . .

200 ∼ 299 Reconstruction. . . .

300 ∼ 399 Display. . . .

400 ∼ 499 Image File Management. . . .

500 ∼ 599 Communication (Network). . . .

600 ∼ 699 Multiformat Camera. . . .

700 ∼ 799 (reserved). . . .

800 ∼ 899 (same as Message 000 ∼ 099). . . .

900 ∼ 999 Utility. . . .

Format for Message Lists

The following format is used to list message and error message lists in Sections

*1 *2

ER–001 System Error

*3

*4

*1) Classification of Error/Message and Message No.

*2) Caption Message

*3) Data (40 characters of upper line and 16 characters of lower line are considered as continuous.)

*4) Description


2242063


SYSTEM6–3

REV 0

6-2 MESSAGE LIST

6-2-1 Message List

MS–000 Abort Button on

Abort Button has been pressed.

MS–001 Start Timeout

Scan Start Time–out (Didn’t press the [Start] button in time)

MS–002 Insert KEY–FD

<Key> floppy diskette is not inserted (Can not proceed to Maintenance program).

MS–003 X–Ray Over Range Detect

X–Ray Data (DAS Data) overrange.

MS–004 FPU Busy

FPU is busy.

MS–005 Tube Warm up End

Tube Warm up Routine has completed.

MS–006 Tube Warm up Canceled

Tube Warm up routine was canceled.


2242063


SYSTEM6–4

REV 0

6-2-1 Message List (continued)

MS–007 Reconstruction’s Queue Full

Number of Queue request for priority Recon is full.

MS–008 Recon Completion

XXXXX.XX.XX:XX

� Reconstruction Completed (Informs when Auto Display mode is not selected).

� XXXXX.XX.XX:XX : Shows Image I.D

MS–009 Calibration End

Calibration Program has completed.

MS–010 Calibration Canceled

Calibration routine was canceled.

MS–011 Warm up Scan Set Timeout

Scan set wait for Warm up Scan Timeou (Didn’t push [Scan Set] in time).

MS–060 Display Busy

The requested program is canceled because Display is in use.

MS–061 On–Line CBF

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

This is the message displayed while performing inhalation or transferring data of On–Line CBF.


2242063


SYSTEM6–5

REV 0


MS–070 Image Data Full (Delete & Reset)

Reconstructed Data can not be store in Disk, for Disk is full of Image Data.

Countermeasure: Delete of Archive Image Data, and then pull Rest SW.

MS–071 Image inf. Full in Study

Study No. = XXXXX (Delete & Reset)

Reconstruction is impossible because Image Inf. of study is full.

Countermeasure: Delete unnecessary image data in study XXXXX and then pull Reset SW.

MS–072 Next Scan Preparation Time Out

Just a moment (Max.= 30 sec)

In Dynamic Scan, Scan is not completed within specified delay time.

Countermeasure: Proceed to Scan with no special operation. Push [Abort] button to stop scanning.

MS–073 Pleas delete images in Disk!

Image space in disk is less than 100 images. We recommend you to delete images before scan.

(Vacant Images: xxx)–(Recon Queue: yyy) = xx

The current number of vacant images (available space for new images) is less than 100. This messageappears when the [New Patient] key is pressed, if a number of vacant images (number in recon queue)is less than 100.


2242063


SYSTEM6–6

REV 0


MS–080 Communication Port On Line

When the system is connected to the network using the YMS Link, this message indicates that the sys-tem can be communicated to others. When the Ethernet Link is used, it indicates only that the powerswitch has been turned ON.

MS–081 Communication Port OFF Line

The Communication between the systems has been disconnected.

MS–082 Not Ready to Receive

Images can not be automatically transferred with the communication port On–line.

MS–083 Disconnected in Receiving Data

Communication is disconnected while receiving data.

MS–084 Duplicate Image

When the image is received, the image with the same image ID has been registered.

MS–085 Mismatched Data Patient

When the DC–X contains the optional PDB (Patient Data Base), the image of MDP has been received.

MS–086 Study not Found

The designated Study can not be found.


2242063


SYSTEM6–7

REV 0


MS–087 Already Registered Image

The received image has already been registered on the optional PDB of the DC–X.

MS–088 Auto–Trans Target

The image that will be automatically transferred.

MS–089 New Station Registered

A new station has been registered.


2242063


SYSTEM6–8

REV 0


MS–090 Auto DEL: Insufficient Send Image

When the images is automatically transferred, the Auto delete function has been worked; however, suffi-cient space for the image can not have been obtained.

MS–091 Received Image

Images have been received.

MS–092 Refused Receiving Image

Receiving images have been refused.

MS–093 Warning – Unexpected Study Inf.

Incorrect study information.

MS–094 Warning – Unexpected Image Inf.

Incorrect image information.

MS–099 On Dynamic Scan

The current function stops for Dynamic Scan.

The function restarts after Dynamic Scan completes.


2242063


SYSTEM6–9

REV 0

6-2-2 Error Message List

ER–001 System Error

YYXXXXXX

System failureError of Directive/System Subroutine etc.

YYXXXXXX:

System Error Code – Section 6-3-1 For Error Message ER–001 (YY=08, 10, 18, 20, 58)

INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Section 6-3-2 (YY=80, 88)

DMA Error Code – Section 6-3-3 (YY=28)

DISPLAY Error Code – Section 6-3-5 (YY=30, 38, 40, 90, 98)

(Refer to Section 6-3, Error Code List, about these Error Codes.)

ER–002 Undefined Event Received

XXXXXXXX

There was a failure in the Event Data (Communication message).

XXXXXXXX: The head 4 bytes of Event Data

(This error is a software problem indicator used by design engineering.)

ER–003 Abnormal Termination Detected

XXXXXXXX AAAA

Task was terminated abnormally.

XXXXXXXX ↓ Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER–003 & 004

AAAA: Task name which was aborted.


2242063


SYSTEM6–10

REV 0

6-2-2 Error Message List (continued)

ER–004 Task Termination

BY BBBB XXXXXXXX

TN = AAAA CODE = YY

EDSP detected the termination of Task. This output occurs during normal or abnormal operation be-cause the software is written that way.

AAAA: Task name which terminated.BBBB: Task name which terminated Task AAAA.

XXXXXXXX ↓ Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER–003 & 004

NoteThe format of TN CODE is different from other formats.

YY: 01: Normal Termination (In case of normal termination, there is another error message).02: Abnormal Termination

EDSP: Error Display Task Name.

ER–099 TREND Task Error

XXXXXXXX

This Error occurred when the Error Message was about to register to Disk at TREND Task. (If the ‘Error’function is called by its normal Error No., the Error could make a permanent loop and bypass the normalpath from EDSP to TREND.)

XXXXXXXX: Return Code (This code is used by design engineering.)

TREND: Trend File of Message

ER–100 Aperture Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Aperture Receive Command Error2: Aperture 1mm Positioning Error3: Aperture 2mm Positioning Error4: Aperture 5mm Positioning Error5: Aperture 10mm Positioning Error6: Aperture 3mm Positioning Error7: Gantry is not in System Mode


2242063


SYSTEM6–11

REV 0


ER–101 Axial Scan Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Axial Scan Request Command Error2: Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is actuated.

(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–up error is detected.)4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.5: Gantry is not in System Mode.6: Gantry Rotation Not Responding7: Gantry Rotation Over Speed (More than 120% speed)8: Aperture Positioning Error9: Table Positioning Error10: Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error11: Gantry Not at Rest Position12: Not used13: Not used14: Gantry Position Error (2° internal from the rest position)15: Gantry Speed Error (Less than 50% speed)

ER–102 Gantry Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Gantry Request Command Error2: Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.

(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–Up Error is detected.)4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected5: Gantry is not in System Mode.6: Gantry Rotation Not Response7: Gantry rotation Over Speed


2242063


SYSTEM6–12

REV 0


ER–103 Stationary Scan Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Stationary Scan Request Command Error2: Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)3: Not used4: Not used5: Gantry is not in System Mode.6: Not used7: Not used8: Aperture Positioning Error9: Table Positioning Error10: Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error (105%)11: Gantry Not at Rest Position

ER–104 Manual Gantry Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Not used2: Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.

(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–Up Error is detected)4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.5: Gantry is not in System Mode.6: Gantry Rotation Not Response7: Gantry Rotation Over Speed


2242063


SYSTEM6–13

REV 0


ER–105 Gantry Elec. Communication Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)2: Response Time out (No Response within 1 second)3: Data Sum check Error

NoteCommunication data between TGP and Scan Processor.

4: Receive Command Data Error(Error Codes 5 to B show serial Data communications Errors)

5: Framing Error6: Over Run Error7: Parity Error8: Framing Error and Over Run Error9: Over Run and Parity Error10: Framing error and Parity Error11: Framing, Over Run and Parity Error

ER–106 Tilt Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Out of Tilt Range – Tilt Request from OC is out of Range

ER–107 Scout Scan Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Cradle Positioning Command is out of Range2: Cradle Unlatch3: Cradle Slip Error4: Cradle Stop Error5: Offset Data Gathering Time–out (2 seconds)6: Not used7: Not used8: Cradle Moving Time–out9: Gantry Illegal Rotation during scout Scan10: Scout Scan Back up timer Error (105% of Normal Time)


2242063


SYSTEM6–14

REV 0


ER–108 Manual Cradle Error

(No Error code)

ER–109 Cradle Mode Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Cradle Positioning command from OC is out of Range2: Cradle Unlatch3: Cradle Slip Error4: Cradle stop Error

ER–110 Manual Table Error

(No Error code)

ER–111 Table Elec. Communication Error

X

Error Code X =

1: Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)2: Response Time–out (No response with in 1 second)3: Data SUM Check Error4: Receive Command Data Error5: Framing Error 6: Over Run Error 7: Parity Error 8: Framing error and Over Run Error Serial data Communication Error9: Over Run and Parity Error 10: Framing Error and Parity Error 11: Framing, Over Run, and Parity Error


2242063


SYSTEM6–15

REV 0


ER–112 XG Communication Error

XX

Error Code X =

1: Hard Error (Parity error, Framing error, or Over Run error)2: Sum Check Error4: Response Time–out8: Non Acknowledge Response (3 times)

ER–113 XG Error

LED STATUS = uvwxyz, %%%KV, %%%MA, HV TIME=%%%%%msec

NV TIME: Time between HV ON and XG FAIL

LED STATUS=uvwxyz: This hexadecimal code shows the LED status (D23 ∼ D39) on the Power ContAssy into the X0Ray Generator as shown:

u: 0 ∼ 3 0 0 D23 D24D23: Over voltage P4D24: Over voltage N4

v: 0 ∼ F D25 D26 D27 D26D25: Over Voltage P1D26: Over Voltage N1D27: Down Voltage P4D28: Down Voltage N4

w: 0 ∼ 3 0 0 D29 D30D29: Over Load PD30: Over Load N

x: 0 ∼ F D31 D32 D33 D34D31: Over HeatD32: Rotor Over CurrentD33: Filament Over CurrentD34: Power Fail

y: 0z: 1 ∼ 7 D35 D36 D37 D38

1: HV ON Over time (more than 14.67sec below 100mA)2: HV ON Over time (more than 5.64sec above 100mA)3: FIL3 SW does not match soft SW.4: Can not select 80 or 140 kV for soft SW.5: RAM over error6: RAM set error7: RAM clear error

ER–114 Cradle is not latched

Cradle Unlatch


2242063


SYSTEM6–16

REV 0


ER–115 TGE Response Timeout

XX

Error Code XX =

1: TGE ready wait Time–out2: TGE new patient wait Time–out3: TGE H/F first wait Time–out4: TGE bui (Scan Position) wait Time–out5: TGE scout/axial wait Time–out6: TGE scan set wait Time–out7: TGE scan end wait Time–out8: TGE scan cradle stop wait Time–out12: TGE cradle stop wait Time–out13: TGE warm up wait Time–out14: TGE off–line wait Time–out15: TGE cradle stop wait Time–out16: TGE move gantry wait Time–out17: TGE off–line scan wait Time–out

ER–116 XG Response Timeout

X

Error Code X =

1: XG Rotor on wait Time–out2: XG HV on wait Time–out3: XG HV OFF wait Time–out4: XG Abort (Rotor OFF) wait Time–out5: XG Rotor OFF wait Time–out6: XG Next Scan Set OK wait Time–out

ER–117 XG Fail

X

XG FailNo Error CodeSee LED status of Power Cont Assy.


2242063


SYSTEM6–17

REV 0


ER–118 SCNCTL Sequence Error

X

(Scan Control Sequence Error)

If Error Address is :

0XXXXXXX: HV ON/OFF Sequence ErrorScan End status is received before receiving HV ON/OFF status during scan.

4XXXXXXX: Sequence Error of Sequential Scan

8XXXXXXX: Scan Sequence Error generated by Scan Task Program

ER–119 Study No. Error

(No Error Code)

The study No. is not the ASCII numeric data.

The memory might be faulty, or some program might have destroyed the data. Inspect the memory(Common memory) by the diagnostic program. If the memory is found to be normal, replace the systemsoftware.

ER–120 Cooling Wait Too Long

(No Error Code)

The cooling wait time has elapsed for a longer time than the specified one. (when off–line scans areperformed)

Retry the scan with the less heavy scan technique, or retry the scan after some time (pretty long) haspassed.

ER–121 Next Scan Preparation Timeout

(No Error Code)

Scan task response time–out error.

ER–122 X–Ray Zero Detect

(No Error Code)

Zero data is detected. Check for the detector using support function.


2242063


SYSTEM6–18

REV 0


ER–130 Comm. Write Reg. Ans. Net. Wait

(No Error Code)

Received the WRITE REGISTER ANSWER INTERRUPT back, without having requested it.

ER–131 Comm. Receive Buffer Over

X

(No Error Code)

Communication Receive Buffer over flow

ER–132 Comm. Transmit Buffer Over

(No Error Code)

Communication Transmit Buffer over flow

ER–133 Comm. Writ Reg. Ans. Timeout

(No Error Code)

Communication Write Register Answer Time–out Error.


2242063


SYSTEM6–19

REV 0


ER–135 PNLCTL Sequence Error

XXXXX XXX XXX

XXXXX XXX XXXShow Error Code Show Wait Code

(Not used)

NotePNLCTL: PANEL CONTROL

Error Code =

1: System ready Sequence Error2: Hew patient OK/NG Sequence Error3: H/F First OK/NG Sequence Error4: Scan Position OK/NG Sequence Error5: Scout/Axial NG Sequence Error6: Scan OK Sequence Error7: Scan NG Sequence Error8: Scan Set OK/NG Sequence Error9: Start NG Sequence Error10: Next Scan OK Sequence Error11: Scan and Sequence Error12: Scan Sequence Error13: Scan/Axial F–on req. Sequence Error (F–On req.: Push Button Flashing Request)16: On–line Request Sequence Error17: OFF–line Scan reg. Sequence Error18: Warm up and Sequence Error19: Scan abort enable OK sequence Error

ER–140 Anode Temperatures Over

XXXX.XX

XXXX.XX: Shows Anode Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.

Tube Anode Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.

NoteTo exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).

ER–141 Case Temperature Over

XX.XXX

XX.XXX: Shows Case Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.

Tube Case Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.

NoteTo exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).


2242063


SYSTEM6–20

REV 0


ER–151 Scan Timeout

XXXXXX

XXXXXX: Shows DAS DATA DMA Count in Decimal(Shows Number of Collected data including offset data)

Shortage of DAS DATA

ER–152 Warm up Error

XXXX

XXXX :Shows kind of ErrorREF :Count ErrorSD :Standard Deviation ErrorRATE :Rate ErrorHPF :High Frequency Component Error

� REF

9000 ≤ (Mean value of REF ch.1∼22, 23∼44 with offset correction) ≤ 50000

� HPF

≤ 0.01 (1%)

� RATE

≤ 0.01 (10%)

� S.D.

≤ 0.02 (2%)

ER–153 Initialize Air Data Error

Please check and clean up Gantry aperture.

Raw Data check error when initializing air data.

Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)

Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)

Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)S.D (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)


2242063


SYSTEM6–21

REV 0


ER–160 Event Sequence Error

Error in Event Sequence of Up data, OK/NO Good, etc. by Off–Line End Demand or Soft Key.

ER–201 Recon Timeout

PPPPP.SS.AA:II

PPPPP.SS.AA:II Shows Image ID Number Reconstruction Time–out

ER–202 Invalid Parameter

SSSSSSSS

SSSSSSSS: Shows invalid parameter for Reconstruction

This error shows that conversion error occurs during conversation between Operator and CPU. Suspect hardware.

ER–400 Duplicate Study ID Deleted

STDPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

There were duplicate STUDY IDs in a STUDY POINTER area, therefore the latter study is deleted.

If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued. Otherwise it is probably asoftware bug.

ER–401 No study Inf. ID Deleted


The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because there is no STUDY INF. corresponding to theSTUDY POINTER.


ER–402 Illegal Study Eye Catcher


The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because EYE CATCHER of STUDY INF. differs.



2242063


SYSTEM6–22

REV 0


ER–403 Illegal Study ID Deleted


STDPINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

STUDY ID of STUDY INF which is chained from STUDY POINTER was different from the STUDYPOINTER contents, therefor, STUDY POINTER deleted.


ER–404 Study in Old Area Deleted

STDINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to new STUDY INF in the old area, the designatedSTUDY POINTER was deleted.


ER–405 Old Study Inf. study Deleted


There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to old STUDY INF in the new area, therefore thedesignated STUDY POINTER was deleted.


ER–406 Same Area Inf. Study Deleted


STUDY POINTER which had same area was found in STUDY INF., therefor, the designated STUDYPOINTER was deleted.


ER–407 No Buffer for Image Inf.


Buffer to read IMGINF is not found.



2242063


SYSTEM6–23

REV 0


ER–408 Image Inf. Size Over


IMGINF which should be read in Buffer is over the Buffer size.


ER–409 Illegal Image Inf Eye Catcher


EYE CATCHER of IMGINF differs, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.

NoteTo resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.

ER–410 Illegal Study No Image Deleted


IMGINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

IMGINF SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX

STUDY NOs between STUDY INF and IMAGE INF differ, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.

ER–411 Duplicate Image Inf Deleted



The Duplicate IMAGE IDs are found in IMGINF, therefore the latter was deleted.


ER–412 No Image Data Image Inf Deleted



IMAGE DATA is not found, therefore, IMGINF wad deleted.



2242063


SYSTEM6–24

REV 0


ER–413 Illegal Study ID Image Deleted



IMGPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

IMGPTR SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX

IMGINF was deleted because it is different in STUDY ID of IMAGE POINTER.

NoteTo resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.

ER–414 Illegal Study ID image Deleted





IMGINF deleted so that it is different IMAGE ID OF IMAGE POINTER.


ER–415 Same Area Image Inf. Deleted



Same AREA is used in IMAGE DATA, therefore, the later IMGINF was deleted.


ER–416 Image Data Area Size Over



The required IMAGE DATA area is larger than the available area.


ER–417 Duplicate Image Pointer Deleted



IMGINF which is means same area was found, therefore, the latter IMGINF was deleted.



2242063


SYSTEM6–25

REV 0


ER–418 Image Pointer Area Size Over



The required IMAGE POINTER area is larger than the available area.

If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued.

ER–419 Same Area Image Inf Deleted



Two IMGINF were found in the same area, therefor, the latter was deleted.


ER–420 Image Inf Area Size Over



The required IMGINF area is larger than the available area.


ER–421 No Image Inf Study Inf Deleted


STDINF which does not have IMGINF wad found, therefor, the designated STDINF was deleted.


ER–422 Study Inf area Size Over


The required STDINF are is larger than the available area. Suspect that disk is full.


2242063


SYSTEM6–26

REV 0


ER–431 Event Sequence Error

XXXXXXXX YY

The Event was received with illegal timing as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.

XXXXXXXX : The top 4 Bytes of Event.

YY : SEQUENCE00 Wait status for start from DIMCTL01 Wait status for FD CHECK02 Wait status for FD FORMAT03 Wait status for MT CHECK04 Wait status for MT FORMAT05 Wait status for temporary halt response

ER–432 Logical Error

Logic Error occurred as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.

ER–433 Image Already Stored

ID = XX:XXXXX.XX.XX:XX

This image already stored on MT, FD, or OD (Discovered while trying to store this image)

ER–434 Image Already Exist


This image already exists. (Discovered while trying to retrieve this image)

ER–435 Image Not Found


Couldn’t find this image during sore or retrieve to requested Disk or Device.

ER–436 Image in Scan study, No Load


Cannot retrieve this Image Study # because the current scanning Study has the same number.


2242063


SYSTEM6–27

REV 0


ER–437 OD Study Incorrect, No Store


Either only Study Inf. or only Image Inf. exists in the Study when storing to OD. So, impossible to store.

Countermeasure: Perform OD sweeper in Maintenance Program.

ER–440 OD Study Inf Nothing

MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX

Image inf. file of the study exists, but the OD cannot find corresponding Image data, so it cannot retrievethe data.


ER–441 OD Image Inf. Nothing


The Study exists in OD, but the Image Inf. File of the Study does not exist in OD. So, impossible to ac-cess the Study.


ER–442 OD study Inf. Incorrect


NO. OF IMAGES IN STUDY INF = XXX

NO. OF IMAGES IN IMAGE INF. FILE = XXX

The Number of Images in Study Inf. differs from the actual number of Inf. in Image Inf. File in OD. Tiis possible to display, but impossible to write.


ER–443 OD Study Inf. Nothing Deleted


Image inf. file for the study exists, but the OD cannot find the corresponding image data: therefore thedesignated Image Inf. file was deleted.

ER–500 Inhalator Not Ready

Inhalator Ready Time–out


2242063


SYSTEM6–28

REV 0

6-3 ERROR CODE LIST

Format for Error Code

00001000: DIRECTIVE ERROR 08XXYYZZ01011000: DIRECTIVE ERROR 58XXYYZZ00010000: IOS ERROR 100000ZZ00011000: FHS ERROR 180000ZZ00101000: DMA ERROR 280000ZZ10000000: INFCTL ERROR 800000ZZ10001000: IMGCTL ERROR 880000ZZ

XX: Request Directive NumberYY: Terget CPU Number

01 or 03:CPUZZ: Error Code

X X Y Y Z Z

Refer to System Error Code

Refer to DMA Error Code


2242063


SYSTEM6–29

REV 0

6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code

For Error Message ER–001

SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OC)

� 08XX00ZZ

08010003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK08010005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL08010006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME08010008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY0801000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK0801000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT08020003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK08020007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME0802000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK08040005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL08040006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME08040007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME0804000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT08060003 SOURCE TASK NOT FOUND08060007 DESTINATION TASK NOT FOUND08060009 USER TO SYSTEM TASK NOT ALLOWED0806000B ADDRESSES DIFFERENT EVEN/ODD BOUNDARY08090003 TARGET TASK NOT FOUND080B0006 DUPLICATE TASK NAME080B0008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY080D0003 TASK DOES NOT EXIST080D0023 TASK DOES NOT EXIST080D000A TASK NOT DORMANT08100003 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST08100023 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST08100006 TARGET TASK ALREADY IN TERMINATION08100009 USER TASK CAN NOT TERMINATE SYSTEM TASK OR SELF08170003 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST08170023 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST0817000A TASK IS TERMINATING08190003 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST08190023 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST08190006 TARGET TASK ALREADY STOPPED08190009 USER TASK CAN NOT STOP SYSTEM TASK083A0001 UNDEFINED XI/O083A0002 UNIMPLEMENTED I/O083A0003 TASK NOT–EXISTED083A0008 UNDEFINED I/O083A0009 MULTIPLE ASSIGN083AFF81 CLOSE ERROR083AFF82 ALLOCATE ERROR


2242063


SYSTEM6–30

REV 0

6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code (continued)

SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OS)

� 100000ZZ

1000000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE10000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT10000021 CFMS CPU FAIL10000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL10000082 INVALID FUNCTION10000083 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT10000084 INVALID DATA BUFFER10000085 INVALID RANDOM RECORD10000086 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS10000087 PROTECT CODE ERROR100000C1 BUFFER OVERFLOW100000C2 END OF FILE100000C3 END OF VOLUME100000C4 INVALID OR EMPTY FAB100000C5 INVALID TRANSFER FOR DEVICE100000C6 BREAK CONDITION100000C7 INTERNAL IO ERROR100000C8 FAB/DATA BLOCK CONFLICT100000C9 RECORD DOES NOT EXIST100000CA RECORD ALREADY EXISTS100000CB RECORD OVERFLOW/TOO MANY RECORDS IN DATA BLOCK100000CC KEY ERROR, FAB KEY CONFLICT100000CD DISK SPACE FULL100000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR100000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR100000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR100000E1 DEVICE NOT READY100000E2 DEVICE BUSY100000E3 DATA CRC ERROR100000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE100000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED100000E6 TIMEOUT100000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS100000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR100000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR100000EA DATA OVERRUN100000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED100000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND100000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR100000EE SEEK ERROR100000EF BAD SECTOR


2242063


SYSTEM6–31

REV 0



� 100000ZZ (continued)

100000F1 CHANNEL BUSY100000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR100000F3 CHANNEL UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR100000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR100000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR100000F6 DMA BUS ERROR100000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR100000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR

For MT

10000088 INVALID BLOCK LENGTH10000091 TAPE MISMATCH (800/1600BPI)10000092 FILE NOT FOUND (MT)10000093 REJECTED BY MT10000094 DATA SHORT 0 (MT BLOCK READ)10000095 LOST DATA 010000096 ERROR CORRECTED (MT WRITE)10000097 I/O ERROR (MT DIRECTIVE)10000098 I/O ERROR (MT PACKET)10000099 INCONSISTENCY OF WRITING TYPE (MT)1000009A FILE MARK ERROR (MT)100000C6 INTERNAL ERROR100000C9 BLOCK DOESN’T EXIST100000CD INSUFFICIENT TAPE SPACE

For OD

100000A0 INVALID COMMAND100000A1 PBN NOT FOUND100000A2 UNWRITTEN (READ)100000A3 DELETED (READ)100000A4 OVER WRITE (WRITE)100000A5 ALTERNATE TRACK FULL (WRITE)100000A7 DON’T SEARCH UNWRITTEN100000A8 BUS ERROR100000A9 BUS TIME OUT100000AA DVC TIME OUT100000AB GPIB COMMUNICATION ERROR100000AC DISK PERMANENT ERROR (READ)100000AD DISK PERMANENT ERROR (WRITE)100000AE DRIVE ERROR100000AF ODC ERROR


2242063


SYSTEM6–32

REV 0



� 180000ZZ

18000002 INVALID COMMAND18000003 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT18000004 INVALID OR NONEXISTENT VOLUME18000005 DUPLICATE FILE NAME18000006 FILE DESCRIPTOR ERROR18000007 PROTECT CODE ERROR18000008 RECORD LENGTH ERROR18000009 SHARED SEGMENT ERROR1800000A INSUFFICIENT DIRECTORY SPACE1800000B ACCESS PERMISSION ERROR1800000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE1800000D ASSIGNMENT ERROR1800000E INVALID DEVICE DEVICE TYPE1800000F BUFFER OVERFLOW18000010 INVALID TASK NAME18000011 INVALID BUFFER ADDRESS18000012 INVALID FILE TYPE18000013 INTERNAL FHS ERROR18000014 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS18000015 DATA BLOCK LENGTH ERROR18000016 SIZE ERROR18000017 NONEXISTENT FILE NAME18000019 KEY LENGTH ERROR1800001A FAB LENGTH ERROR1800001B DEFAULT VOLUME NOT DEFINED1800001C INVALID STATE FOR COMMAND1800001D USER NOT OWNER OR ADMINISTRATOR18000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT18000021 CFMS CPU FAIL18000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL180000CD DISK SPACE FULL180000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR180000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR180000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR


2242063


SYSTEM6–33

REV 0



� 180000ZZ (continued)

180000E1 DEVICE NOT READY180000E2 DEVICE BUSY180000E3 DATA CRC ERROR180000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE180000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED180000E6 TIMEOUT180000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS180000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR180000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR180000EA DATA OVERRUN180000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED180000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND180000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR180000EE SEEK ERROR180000EF BAD SECTOR180000F1 CHANNEL BUSY180000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR180000F3 UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR180000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR180000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR180000F6 DMA BUS ERROR180000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR180000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR

� 200000ZZ

20000001 UNDEFINED DIRECTIVE20000012 OUT OF SEGMENT AREA20000013 FILE IS NOT A LOAD FILE

� 58XXYYZZ

5814YY30 TARGET CPU HALT5814YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT5823YY30 TARGET CPU HALT5823YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT

(FILE PROCESSOR)YY: LOGICAL CPU NO. 01 or 03: CPW


2242063


SYSTEM6–34

REV 0



NoteNormally though an error codes are displayed in eight digits, the error codes occurred y the Ethernetnetwork are often in four digits. Note that the dummy code of ‘0000’ or ‘FFFF’ might be added to theoriginal error code blow (80XX):

� 80XX

8006 TASK STOP INSTRUCTION FROM TERMINAL8009 UNEXPECTED BREAK8010 BUS ERROR8011 ADDRESS ERROR8012 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION8013 ZERO DIVIDE8014 CHK INSTRUCTION8015 TRAPV INSTRUCTION8016 PRIVILEGE VIOLATION8017 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1010)8018 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1011)8040 COMPULSORY STOP

� 00XXYYZZ

XX

01 ACK TIMEOVER02 RESPONSE TIMEOVER03 ACK AND RESPONSE TIMEOVER04 RESPONSE SEQUENCE ERROR08 RESET REQUEST10 BUS/ADDRESS ERROR IN COMMAND LIST20 RETRY OVER80 DEVICE ERROR

YYZZ

0802 F–PORT TIMEOUT1002 BUS ERROR2001 NO LUTB2002 MAPPING ERROR4001 COMMAND IN RUN4002 V–BUS TIMEOUT4021 COMMAND IN RUN4041 COMMAND IN RUN8001 INVALID COMMAND8002 INVALID COMMAND8021 INVALID COMMAND8041 INVALID COMMAND


2242063


SYSTEM6–35

REV 0


For Error Message ER–003, ER–004

TERMINATION CODE (GENERATED BY EXEC)

� XXXX

8010 BUS ERROR8011 ADDRESS ERROR8012 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION8013 ZERO DIVIDE8014 CHK INSTRUCTION8015 TRAP INSTRUCTION8016 PRIVILEGE INSTRUCTION8017 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1010)8018 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1010)


2242063


SYSTEM6–36

REV 0

6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code

� Code (ZZ)

A1 Error of GETADC or GETADA

A2 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEMCONSTANT. (DISK)

A3 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEMCONSTANT.

A4 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is 0.

A5 The number of IMAGE DATA FILE BLOCK is lass that the number in SYSTEM WORK.

A6 IMAGE INFORMATION BUFFER is smaller than all IMAGE INFORMATION SIZE in 1 STUDY.

A7 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEMCONSTANT. (OD)

Table 6–1 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Allocate

Code (ZZ) Description

00 The designated Study was already registered.

01 The designated Study does not exist.

02 The designated Image was already registered.

03 Image No. Deciding Error.

04 Study Area full./ OD Study INF file full.

05 Image INF Block full./OD Image INF file full.

06 The Area in Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.

07 Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.

08 There is no space in Image INF BUFFER.

09 The size of Image INF is too big.

0A Study INF Initial Value Error.

0B Image INF Initial Value Error.

0C The designated Image doesn’t exist.

0D Number Full (SER, ACQ IMG)

0E N/A

0F N/A

10 OD Off line

11 OD Protected

12 Impossible to Allocate for Illegal Form of STUDY, IMAGE INF.


2242063


SYSTEM6–37

REV 0

6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code (continued)

Table 6–2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Delete


20 The designated Study does not exist.

21 There is no specified Study. It is not deleted.

22 There was not enough in the specified Study.

23 There is no specified Image. Ti is not deleted.

24 There was not enough in specified Image.


26 The reading size of Image INF is too big.

27 N/A

28 Impossible to delete for all of the appointed study are protected from Delete.

29 Impossible to delete for some of the appointed study are protected from Delete.

2A Impossible to delete for the study of the appointed Image is protected from delete

2B N/A

2C N/A

2D N/A

2E N/A

2F N/A

30 OD Off line

31 OD Protected

32 Impossible to delete for Illegal From of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.


2242063


SYSTEM6–38

REV 0


Table 6–3 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – GET/PUT


40 There is no designated Study.

41 There is no pertinent Image.


43 The reading size of Image INF is too big.

44 Access is out of Image Area.

45 N/A

46 N/A

47 N/A

48 N/A

49 N/A

4A N/A

4B N/A

4C N/A

4D N/A

4E N/A

4F N/A

50 OD Off line

51 OD Protected

52 Impossible to read/write for Illegal Form of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.


2242063


SYSTEM6–39

REV 0


Table 6–4 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Parameter Error


C0 Function No. Error

C1 Station No. Error (It is impossible to change to Mode/Machine No.)

C2 Study No. Error (except for the numeric data)

C3 Series No. error (except for the numeric data)

C4 ACQ No. Error (except for the numeric data)

C5 IMG No. error (except for the numeric data)

C6 There is no STD in STD INF which is ready.

C7 There is no IMG in IMG INF which is ready.

C8 The number of Image INF Block is except for 1 or 2.

C9 The number of Image INF Block is less than 0.

CA The number of List is less than 0.

CB Completion Type Error.

CC Flag Error (Mode etc.)

CD It is not Old in spite of the other machine.

CE Search Mode is 0 and Mode/Machine No. is 1.

CF Image size is 0.


2242063


SYSTEM6–40

REV 0


Table 6–5 INFCTL/IMGCTL – Logic Error of INFCTL/IMGCTL


E0 Event Code Error

E1 Sub Code Error

E2 This was already registered during Study INF Allocate.

E3 This was already registered during Allocate in Image INF File.

E4 N/A

E5 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study Pointer Delete.

E6 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study INF Delete.

E7 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Image INF Delete.

E8 SCBITOPR Error during Study INF Delete.

E9 SCBITOPR Error during Delete in Image INF File.

EA SCBITOPR Error during Image PRT/File Delete.

EB The area in Image INF File full.

EC This was already registered during Image INF Allocate.

ED Scan or Load is different from the position in File during Image INF Allocate.

EE N/A

EF N/A


2242063


SYSTEM6–41

REV 0

6-3-3 Display Error Code

980000XX :User/Prime Display Function

30YY00XX :PLNCTL

38YY00XX :KBDRV

40YY00XX :DPDRV

1000000XX :Connected with WTTY

��YY00XX :Basic Graphic


2242063


SYSTEM6–42

REV 0

6-3-3 Display Error Code (continued)

Table 6–6 Display Error Code

XX Description Task Name

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

Directive No. Error

ODD parameter Address

Invalid Request

Invalid Parameter (W/L Control)

Invalid Parameter (Frame Setting)

Invalid Parameter (Frame Data)

Invalid Parameter (W/L)

Invalid Parameter (Identify)

Invalid Parameter (γ)Invalid Parameter (Image Display)

Invalid Parameter (Image Data Read)

Invalid Parameter (Paging)

Invalid Parameter (Interrupted Image)

Invalid Parameter (Interrupted FPU)

Time Out (Image display)

Time Out (Graphic Cursor)

Time Out (W/L Processing)

Time Out (Interrupted Image)

Time Out (Interrupted FPU)

Graphic Sequence Error

DPDRV

(40YY00XX)

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–43

REV 0


Table 6–6 Display Error Code (continued)


70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

Directive No. Error

ODD Parameter Address

Device No. Error

Invalid Parameter (Erase Processing)

Invalid Parameter (Graphic DMA)

Invalid Parameter (Screen Save)

Invalid Parameter (Overlay Display)

Invalid Parameter (Graphic Cursor)

Invalid Parameter (Report Cursor)

Invalid Parameter (LED/Buzzer)

Time Out (Erase Processing)

Time Out (Graphic DMA)

Time Out (Screen Save–overlay)

Time Out (Screen Save–image)

Time Out (Graphic Cursor)

ACRTC Command Error

Graphic Sequence Error

PLNCTL(30YY00XX)

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–44

REV 0




90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

A0

Directive No. Error

Invalid Parameter Block Address

Invalid Parameter

Invalid Request

Can not requested Command

Invalid No. of characters

Key Board not allocated

Channel Busy

Response Time Out

Hardware Error

Hardware Error

Hardware Error

Hardware Error

KBDRY(38YY00XX)

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Invalid Parameter

Not Defined Area

Duplicate Define

Value Not Defined

Invalid Area Position

Invalid Area Size

DCB Graphic Flag Double Assigned

User/PrimeDisplay Func(980000XX)

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–45

REV 0




B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

User/PrimeDisplay Func(980000XX)

B7

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

Read Event Flag error

Event Status Error

Event Busy Error

Not Enable Mag. Character Error

Cancel Flag Error

Over Split Over Error

Not Split Device Error

Over line error

Invalid Parameter Error

WTTY(100000XX)

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

Write FIFO Empty Time Out Error

Write FIFO Ready Time Out Error

Read FIFO Ready Time Out error

Read FIFO empty Time Out Error

Command End Time Out Error

Command Error

ACRTC Not Ready

BASICGraphic

(30YY00XX)(38YY00XX)(40YY00XX)(98YY00XX)

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–46

REV 0




D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

E0

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

Configuration Error

Operation Timing Error

Address Error

Bus Error

Count Error

Abort

Software Abort

DMAC Ready Time Out Error

BASICGraphic


(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–47

REV 0




F0

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF

Time Out Error

Can not Display During Horizontal Blanking

Can not Refresh DRAM During Horizontal Blanking

Invalid Parameter Error

BASICGraphic


Table 6–7 Display Error Code – 28YY00XX (DMADR V)


00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

Directive No. remains undecided


Invalid Direction code

Invalid Memory Address

Invalid Data Size

Invalid CPU Number

DMADRV

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–48

REV 0


Table 6–7 Display Error Code – 28YY00XX (DMADR V) (continued)


80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

A0

Channel Busy

Configuration Error


Remains undecided

Address Error

Address Error

Address Error

Address Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Count Error

Count Error

Count Error

Count Error

External Compulsory Stop

Software Compulsory Stop

Time Out

DMADRV


2242063


SYSTEM6–49

REV 0


Table 6–8 Display Error Code – 48YY00XX (Image Data Unpack)


01

02

03

04

10

11

20

Directive No. Error

Odd parameter Address

Unpack Task is Busy

Unpack Task is not Busy

Odd Information Block Address

Invalid parameter

Not Dame Task(Different Task from Request one confirmed for completion of Unpack)

Table 6–9 Display Error Code – 5000XXXX (Image Inf. Display)

XXXX Description Task Name

00F0

00F1

00F2

80YY

Image Type is not Supported

Display Task is Busy

Invalid file Name

Task abort (Refer to System Error Code)

Table 6–10 Display Error Code – A8000XXX (Special Error)

XXX Description Task Name

001

002

003

201

202

300

301

302

303

010

100

Internal logic error (IFM Display Error)

GETS error (IFM Display Error)

Internal logic error (IFM Display Error)

OD error (OD Error)

Bit map oversize (OD Error)

Not initialized (OD Error)

Different volume name (OD Error)

Not initialized (OD Error)

Different family name (OD Error)

No station space (INFCTL Error)

System sequence error (INFCTL Error)


2242063


SYSTEM6–50

REV 0

6-3-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code

Table 6–11 FPJOIN Error Code

Error Code Description

00000000 Normal Completion

08UUYYZZ Trap 1 Error



90000001

90000002

90000003

90000004

90000005

90000006

90000007

90000008

90000009

9000000A

9000000B

9000000C

9000000D

9000000E

9000000F

900000FF

PINT (FPU ↔ CPU Interrupt)

Reset

Invalid Parameter

Time Out

Busy (FPU Running)

Busy (FPU Initializing)

Illegal (Error Occurred in FPU)

Reset Error (can not Reset)

Interrupt Over (Interrupt Buffer Overflow)

The IPU is not idling.

(Not–supported function called)


2242063


SYSTEM6–51

REV 0

6-3-5 DMA Error Code

Table 6–12 DMA Error Code

Error Code Description

00000000

28XX0001

28XX0002

28XX0003

28XX0004

28XX0005

28XX0006

28XX0080

28XX0081

28XX0082

28XX0083

28XX0084

28XX0085

28XX0086

28XX0087

28XX0088

28XX0089

28XX008A

28XX008B

28XX008C

28XX008D

28XX008E

28XX008F

28XX0090

28XX0091

28XX00A0

Normal Completion

Directive No. remains undecided


Invalid direction Code

Invalid memory address

Invalid Data Size

Invalid CPU number

Channel Busy

Configuration Error


Reserved

Address Error

Address Error

Address Error

Address Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Bus Error

Count Error

Count Error

Count Error

Count Error

External Compulsory Stop

Software Compulsory Stop

Time Out

Note : XX is Directive number.


2242063


SYSTEM6–52

REV 0

6-3-6 RAWCTL Error Code

00000000 No Error

A0000001 I.D No. Error

A0000002 Not Valid

A0000003 Transfer Byte Error

A0000004 Sub Code Error

A0000005 Size Error

A0000006 Can not Reserve


2242063


SYSTEM6–53

REV 0

6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code

The following error codes are displayed for systems with the ETC board.

Table 6–13 Ethernet OS Error Code

Code Description

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

000A

000B

000C

000D

000E

000F

0010

0011

0012

0020

0021

0022

0030

0031

0032

0033

0034

Task ID error.

Can not keep TCB (Task control block).

Can not keep memory.

Memory block does not exist.

Mail box is in use.

Can not send designated message.

Buffer full.

Abnormal waiting for character entry.

Abnormal system call.

Time out.

Message is not received.

Queue ID error.

Queue full.

Non–existent designated memory partition.

Fatal initialized error occurred.

Character is not entered.

Abnormal configuration parameter OS.

Abnormal parameter when creating or expanding memory partition.

Component vector is not assigned.

Undecided component assigned.

Undecided operation code assigned.

Control block does not exist.

Event flag or semaphore ID error.

Task is waiting for event flag or semaphore.

Event flag or semaphore deleted.

Event flag or semaphore doubled.


2242063


SYSTEM6–54

REV 0

6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code (continued)

Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code

Code Description

0A01

0A03

0A06

0A0D

0A11

0A16

0A18

0A20

0A23

0A24

0A25

0A26

0A27

0A28

0A29

0A2A

0A2B

0A2D

0A2F

0A30

0A31

0A32

0A33

0A35

0A36

0A37

0A38

0A39

0A3C

0A3D

0A40

0A41

Abnormal owner.

Designated process does not exist.

Designated device or address does not exist.

Abnormal access mode.

File is already existed.

Abnormal parameter.

Too many files opened.

Connection destroyed.

Designated operation blocked.

Designated operation is now run.

Designated operation is already run.

Socket operation is run.

Destination address does not exist.

Too long message.

Abnormal protocol for socket.

Invalid designated protocol.

Designated protocol is not supported.

Designated operation is not supported in socket.

Designated address family is not supported.

Designated address is busy.

Can not assign designated address.

Network is down.

Can not connect network due to abnormal AUI cable and ETC.

Software disconnects network.

Connection is reset.

No buffer space.

Designated socket is busy.

Designated socket is not connected.

Connection time out.

Connection rejected.

Satellite down.

No satellite connection.

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–55

REV 0


Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)

Code Description

0A50

0A51

0A52

0A53

0A54

0A55

0A56

0A57

0A58

0A59

0A5A

0A5B

0A5C

0A5D

0A5E

0A5F

0A60

0A61

0A62

0A63

0A64

0A65

0A66

0A67

0A68

0A69

0A6A

0A6B

0A6C

0A6D

0A6E

0A6F

Abnormal configuration parameter.

Insufficient local memory space.

Can not keep ARP table.

designated satellite is not registered.

Abnormal internet address.

Abnormal network setting for internet address.

Insufficient global memory space.

Abnormal configuration parameter.

Faulty Lock

No CDT

PANIC (in–in_control)

PANIC (icmp–icmp_error)

PANIC (icmp–length)

PANIC (ip–init)

PANIC (raw–user req)

PANIC (route–free)

PANIC (tcp–pull oob)

PANIC (tcp–output)

PANIC (tcp–output REXMT)

PANIC (tcp–user req)

PANIC (udp–user req)

PANIC (m_get)

PANIC (m_free)

PANIC (m_copy)

PANIC (m_copy)

PANIC (m_copy)

PANIC (sofree)

PANIC (soclose)

PANIC (soaccept)

PANIC (sorecv)

PANIC (sorecv)

PANIC (sorecv)

(Continued)


2242063


SYSTEM6–56

REV 0


Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)

Code Description

0A70

0A71

0A72

0A73

0A74

0A75

0A76

0A77

PANIC (sorecv)

PANIC (soisconnected)

PANIC (sbappendrights)

PANIC (sbflush)

PANIC (sbflush)

PANIC (sbdrop)

PANIC (accept)

PANIC (arp–no free entry)


2242063


SYSTEM6–57

REV 0


The following table lists the error codes generated by the Ethernet board driver.

Format:XXYZ

XX :Task IDY :Operation CodeZ :Error Code

XX Task ID Y Description Z Description

F0 System Bus Driver 0 Memory space 1 Table Full

1 Packet transmission 2 Busy

2 Packet reception 3 Abnormal Pattern

4 CPU board 4 Over range

5 Packet switching itself 6 Request Doubled

F1 Ethernet Driver 0 Initialization 7 Abnormal designated Address

1 Transmission 8 Not Found

2 Reception C Retry counts over specifications

F2 Modem Driver 0 Initialization D failed

1 Transmission E Not Supported

2 Reception F Not Ready

F9 I/F Manager onCPU BD

1 Initialization of Ethernet BDCPU BD

2 Queue transmission for task ofEthernet BD

3 Mail transmission for task of Ehter-net BD

4 Temporary stop for task of EhernetBD

5 Operation resumption for task ofEthernet BD

6 Task deletion of Ethernet BD

7 Task load start of Ethernet BD

8 Next operation mode setting ofEthernet BD

9 Memory access of Ethernet BD

FA I/F Manager onEthernet BD

7 Task load startEthernet BD

9 Memory access

FB Program Loader Remains Undecided


2242063


SYSTEM6–58

blank


2242063


SYSTEM7–1

REV 0

SECTION 7 – IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION

7-1 DESCRIPTION

MTR Survey Program

Image spatial resolution can be measured by scanning a GE Performance Phantom and analyzing the acquired imagewith the MTF Survey program included in Support within the Maintenance menu.

The MTF Survey program calculates MTF data by the two–dimensional Fourier Transform of the point spread functionusing pixel data around the wire.Since the program stores the result to a mean file, analyze the result using Support display, and evaluate the systemspatial resolution performance.

The following section describes the procedure for this spatial resolution evaluation using MTF Survey.


2242063


SYSTEM7–2

REV 0

7-2 PROCEDURE

Special T ools/Supplies

� GE Performance Phantom (2102580)

7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom

1. Set the GE Performance Phantom approximately at the scan center.

2. Touch the [New Patient] button, and then select [Neck].

3. Select ‘OFF’ for Motion Correction

4. Adjust the position of the phantom so that the wire point within the phantom is positioned at the scan center:

a. Perform an axial scan with the following parameters:3.6 or 4.5 sec, 120kV , 160mA (others: default)

b. Display a grid.

c. Measure the distance between the wire point and the scan center in the following way:

i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.

ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the wire point, and then, press the [Dist Angle] key to copy thecursor over the wire point.

iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X Axis, and then, press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end locationand display the distance between the wire point and the X axis (A). See illustration 7–1.

iv. Perform the above to measure the distance between the wire point and the Y axis (B).

Illustration 7–1 Positioning W ire Point to Scan Center

A

Wire PointB

Scan Center

Y

X


2242063


SYSTEM7–3

REV 0

7-2 PROCEDURE (continued)

7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)

d. Shift the phantom so that the wire point is positioned at the scan center, according to the distances measuredat the above step.Use the up–sown adjuster and right–left adjuster o the phantom holder (one turn: 1mm movement).

e. Repeat steps a through d, until the wire point is positioned at the scan center within ± 0.5mm .If the image shows a white band over the wire point, this indicates that the wire point is not yet positionedcorrectly at the scan center. See illustration 7–2.

Illustration 7–2 White Band Over Wire Point

White Band


2242063


SYSTEM7–4

REV 0


7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)

5. Write down the wire point position in pixel:

a. Press the [Crsr] key to display the crosshair cursor on the image.

b. Using the trackball, move the cursor onto the wire point. See illustration 7–3.

c. Press the [Image Meas] key, and then select ‘REPORT CURSOR’.

d. Verify that X and Y locations of the cursor are indicated in ‘cm’ on the upper right of the screen.

e. Press the [End] key once.

f. Press the [Image Trtmt] key, and then select ‘SET DISPLAY’.

g. Select ‘PIXEL INDICATE’.The highlights ‘PIXEL INDICATE’, and then the X and Y locations are indicated in pixel.

h. Write down the wire point position in pixel and image number:

Wire Point Position x (in pixel)

y (in pixel)

Image Number : . . ;

6. Proceed to Section 7-2-2.

Illustration 7–3 Positioning the Cursor onto W ire Point

Wire Point


2242063


SYSTEM7–5

REV 0


7-2-2 MTF Survey Program

1. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan.)

2. Touch the [Maint] key, and enter $$ , as follows:


1. CALIBRATION..

Select No.= $$ ‘CR’

3. Select Support from the Maintenance menu.

4. Select MTF Survey from the Support menu.

5. For the following prompts, enter as described:

a. Enter the image ID recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.

b. Enter X location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.

c. Enter Y location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.

d. ‘AREA SIZE <8 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 128 (pixel)> (32)’

� Press the [Enter] key to accept the default value.

e. ‘EDGE (pixel) (4)’

� Press the [Enter] key to accept the default value.It will take approximately 30 seconds until the next prompt appears.

f. ‘SELECT GRAPH TYPE <1:STND / 2:BONE / 3:MANUAL>’

� Select ‘MANUAL’

g. ‘Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm) (12)’

� Press the [Enter] key to accept the default value.

h. ‘Enter MEAN FILE No. <1–16>’

� Enter ‘1’ as the mean file No.This mean file contains the result of analysis performed by this MTF Survey program.

6. Press the [End] key twice.

7. Proceed to Section 7-2-3.


2242063


SYSTEM7–6

REV 0


7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve)

1. Select Support display from the Maintenance menu.

2. Select File Selection .

a. Enter M from FILE NAME.

b. Enter 0 from MIN.

c. Enter 1000 for MAX.

3. Select Set Cursor .

a. Enter 1 for CHANNEL.

b. Enter 1 for DATA. (the calculated mean file No.)

4. Select Profile (H) .

a. Enter 0 for DATA MIN.

b. Enter 1.2 for DATA MAX.

A graph is drawn, as is shown in illustration 7–4.

Illustration 7–4 MTF Curve

EXAMPLE

1.000

0.800

0.600

0.400

0.200

2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000


2242063


SYSTEM7–7

REV 0


7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) (continued)

5. From the graph, read ‘lp/cm’ values for 50% and 10% of the MTF curve.

Write down the values in the table below.

Illustration 7–5 Reading MTF Curve

EXAMPLE

1.000

0.800

0.600

0.400

0.200

2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000

50%

10%

MTF 50% 10%

Measured V alue lp/cm lp/cm


2242063


SYSTEM7–8

blank


2242063


OPERATOR CONSOLEi

REV 0

OPERATOR CONSOLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – POWER UP SEQUENCE 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 OVERVIEW (INCLUDE: READING HEXA–DECIMAL LED STATUS) 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-1 Switch Setting 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-2 Hardware Configuration 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-1 Test Sequence 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2 Test Items 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 ERROR CODE 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – OFF–LINE TEST 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 GENERAL 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1 Overview 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2 External Display Terminal 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3 Extension Boards 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 OFF–LINE TEST OPERATION 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-2 Off–Line Test Main Menu 2–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3 CPW OFF–LINE TEST 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-1 Required Hardware 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-2 Test Items (CPW Off–Line Test) 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4 IPU OFF–LINE TEST 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4-1 Required Hardware 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4-2 Test Item (IPU Off–Line Test) 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4-3 Test Items Description 2–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5 DISP OFF–LINE TEST 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-1 Required Hardware 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-2 Test Menu Screen 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-3 Test Items (DISP Off–Line Test) 2–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6 MISC OFF–LINE TEST 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-1 Required Hardware 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-2 Test Menu Screen 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line Test) 2–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7 SBPU OFF–LINE TEST 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-1 Required Hardware 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-2 Test Items (SBPU Off–Line Test) 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


OPERATOR CONSOLEii

REV 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 3 – ETC BOARD TEST 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1 General 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-3 Running the Test 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-4 LED Indications 3–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-5 Error Code 3–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1 General 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-2 Required hardware 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-3 Switch Setting 3–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-4 External display Terminal 3–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation 3–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION 3–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 CPW 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 IPU2 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 DISP 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 MISC 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 ISC 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 ODC2 (OPTION) 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 MTC (OPTION) 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 ETC (OPTION) 4–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX A – CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE A–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


OPERATOR CONSOLE1–1

REV 0

SECTION 1 – POWER UP SEQUENCE

1-1 OVERVIEW (INCLUDE: READING HEXA–DECIMAL LED ST ATUS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Power–ON test program is used for OC self–diagnostics during the Power up sequence, and is resident in theROM on the CPW assy.

This test program has two categories: Power On Test 1 (P–ON1) and Power On Test 2 (P–ON2).The P–ON Test 2 includes more detailed tests than P–ON Test 1, and takes longer to run. P–ON Test 1 is normally selected during routine customer operation. P–ON Test 2 can be used by the field engineerto perform a more detailed analysis in the event of an error occurring on the system.

During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identifiedin 2 or 3 ways depending on the test concerned as follows:

1. CPW LEDs (all tests)

2. CRT display monitor (all tests, except CPW Phase 1, and DISP Phase 1 tests)

3. Terminal connected to CPW RS232C output (all tests)

See Section 1-2 for more details.

If at any point during the P–ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the failed test number/coderemains on the CPW LEDs. With the exception of CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 1 tests, the test name/descriptionwill also be displayed on the CRT monitor along with a brief error description.

NoteThere normally no need to connect a CPW RS232C terminal, since no additional information otherthan that on the LEDs and monitor can be obtained during P–ON Tests. Connecting a terminal is onlynecessary for the execution of the off line tests.

The total processing time is as follows:

Table 1–1 Test Processing T ime

Test Processing T ime Time from T est Start, to SystemReady

P–ON 1 Test 4:00 minutes. 4:16 minutes.

P–ON 2 Test 13:05 minutes. 13:21 minutes.


2242063



REV 0

1-1 OVERVIEW (continued)

Reading Hexa–decimal Numbers from LEDs

The hexa–decimal number in each rectangle herein represents the LED status displayed on the CPW board. Readthe LEDs from top to bottom (MSB to LSB). Decode the top four LEDs to create the most significant hex digit (theleftmost digit) and the bottom four to create the least significant hex digit (the rightmost digit). All hexa–decimal codesare displayed with the letter ‘H’.

More detailed status and information is displayed on the CRT from CPW Phase 2 test, so it is normally not necessaryto decode the LEDs status.

Example:

87654321

bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (LSB)

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 (90H)

‘�’ means ‘Illuminated’ and equals ‘1’: ‘�’ equals ‘0’. LEDs are set at the start of each routine. If any error occurs duringself–testing, the LEDs display the corresponding error code.


2242063



REV 0

1-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST

1-2-1 Switch Setting

Set the DIP switch on the CPW Assy (location 8A1) as required according to the following:

87654321

NormallyOFF

ON :1OFF :0

1 2 3 Test Mode Selection 7 8 Communication Speed(Unit: Baud)

1 X X Test Skip 0 0 9600

0 1 X OFF–Line Test 0 1 1200

0 0 1 Power On Test 2 1 0 2400

0 0 0 Power On Test 1 1 1 19200

X: Don’t Care. The following parameters are set by default witheach speed setting and cannot be cancelled;–

1. Character length = 8 bits2. Stop Bit = 1 bit3. Party = None

The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the DIP switch settingduring test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change the parameters, first set the DIPSW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.

NoteThis test program does not write any data to the HD, but it does require a properly formatted HD.i.e.: The tests will run with a normal operational HD, but not with an unformatted replacement HD.


2242063



REV 0

1-2-2 Hardware Configuration

The following illustration shows the minimum hardware configuration required to run the test program.

Illustration 1–1 Hardware Configuration

CRT

CPW Assy

IPU2 Assy

DISP Assy

TPC Assy

TPC Assy

HDD #0

HDD #0

4321

ON :1OFF :0

ON

This test program supports one or twoHDD; they are selected by the SW settingon the CPW. See the illustration below forthe proper setting.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

The current revision of the CPW boarddoes not support dual HDD use.

Normally all OFF.

Number of HD

0 One HD

1 Two HDs (Not available)

Always OFF.

System Bus

IO Bus


2242063



REV 0

1-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS

1-3-1 Test Sequence

The following illustration is a flow chart showing the sequence of the Power On Test program and where the resultsare displayed.

Illustration 1–2 Test Sequence Flowchart

Status

CPW Test(Phase 1)

System Power On TestProgram

CPW LEDActivity

Display MonitorActivity

(CPW RS232C)Activity

DISP Test(Phase 1)

CPW Test(Phase 2)

IPU2 Test

DISP Test(Phase 2)

MISC Test

OK

Test Number$11–$18

Start(Power On orReset)

Blank Test Number andPass/Fail Status

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

Status

Test Number$30–$38

Blank Test Number andPass/Fail Status

Status

Test Group$1F

Test Number andPass/Fail Status

Status

Test Number/Group$40–$4E


Status

Test Number/Group$39–$3F


Status

Test Number/Group$2F–$24


$80$8F$90

System PreparationSloader

ThenTerminated

EndSystemPreparation






2242063



REV 0

1-3-2 Test Items

Tables to list the associated parameters of each individual P ON Test. These tables all have the same format andinclude the following information;

� Test number/code and name

� Test mode under which the test is selected (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or both)

� Hardware to be checked – most likely failed assy, in the event of an error occurring.

� Test sequence

The CPW LEDs display a unique test number/code for CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 2 tests. Following these tests,some codes are duplicated. The CRT (on the Operator Console) displays the test program status from CPW TEST(Phase 2 ) onwards.A terminal connected to the CPW will display the test program status fro all tests.

Note shows what boards or devices which are thoroughly tested. shows what boards or devices which are partly testes.

If an error occurs during P ON TEST, the test and CPW LEDs stop to run. In addition, for the testafter CPW test (Phase 2), the error message can be displayed on the CRT monitor.


2242063



REV 0

1-3-2 Test Items (continued)

Table 1–2 CPW Test (Phase 1)

Test Item LED Test Mode Hardware to be CheckedTest Item LED

Status 1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

SRAM W/R/V Test (1) $11

CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM) $12

CPW (2) ROM SUM Check Test $13

CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test $14 *

CPW (4) Control/Status Reg. W/R/V Test $15 *

CPW (5) DMAC Reg. W/R/V Test $16 *

CPW (6) Bus Error Test (IPU MD) $17

CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/R/V Test (1) $18

* : There is a discrepancy between the contents of P–ON Test1 and P–ON Test2.

Table 1–3 DISP Test (Phase 1)



DISP (1) ACRTC Initialize Test $30

DISP (2) ACRTC Pattern RAM W/R/V Test $31 *

DISP (3) OVL Plane Control Reg. W Test $32

DISP (4) DISP Control Reg. W/R/V Test $33

DISP (5) Int. Mask Reg. W/R/V Test $34

DISP (6) ACRTC Interrupt Test $35

DISP (7) VSYNC Interrupt Test $36

DISP (8) OVL Plane Memory W/R/V Test $37 *

DISP (9) ACRTC DMA Test $38



2242063



REV 0


Table 1–4 CPW Test (Phase 2)



CPW (7) FDC Reg. W/R Test $1F

CPW (8) SCSIC Reg. W/R Test $1F

CPW (9) SRAM W/R/V Test (2) $1F *

CPW (10) CPW–DRAm W/R/V Test (2) $1F *

CPW (11) Calendar Read Test $1F

CPW (12) DMA (CPW–DRAM) Test $1F *

CPW (13) DMA (IPU MD) Test $1F *

CPW (14) HD Read Test $1F * HD


Table 1–5 IPU Test

Test Item LEDStat s

TestMode Hardware to be Checked

Test ItemStatus

1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

IPU (1) Reset Reg. R/W Test $40

IPU (2) Abort Reg. R/W Test $40

IPU (3) Ext. MD Reg. from CPU Read Test $40

IPU (4) Interrupt Req. Reg.1 to IPU R/W Test $40



IPU (7) Interrupt Ack. Reg. to IPU R/W Test $40

IPU (8) Extended MD Check $41 Ext MD Slot 1,2

IPU (9) Command Area Access Test $42

IPU (10) CPU MD Access Test $43 *

IPU (11) CPU Extended ME Access Test $43 * Ext MD Slot 1,2

IPU (12) DMA Test $44

IPU (13) Vector Area Fetch Test $45



2242063



REV 0


Table 1–5 IPU Test (continued)

Test Item LEDStat s

TestMode Hardware to be Checked

Test ItemStatus

1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

IPU (14) Interrupt Status Reg. Read Test $46

IPU (15) Interrupt Level Reg. Read Test $46

IPU (16) Interrupt Mask Reg. R/W Test $46

IPU (17) Interrupt ACK Reg. R/W Test $46

IPU (18) Interrupt Req. Reg. Write Test $46

IPU (19) Extended MD Reg. Read Test $46

IPU (20) Status LED Reg. R/W Test $46

IPU (21) Switch Reg. Read Test $46

IPU (22) Driver Area Access Test $47

IPU (23) Interrupt Request Test 1 $49

IPU (24) Interrupt Request Test 2 $49

IPU (25) Simultaneously Access Test $4A

IPU (26–1) Driver Test 1 $4B



IPU (27) Bus Error Test $4B

IPU (28) IPU MD Access Test $4C *

IPU (29) IPU Extended MD Access Test 1 $4C * Ext MD Slot 1,2

IPU (30) IPU Extended MD Access Test 2 $4C * Ext MD Slot 1,2

IPU (31) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 0) $4D

IPU (32) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 1) $4D

IPU (33) Memory Module Test $4E Ext MD Slot 1,2



2242063



REV 0


Table 1–6 DISP Test (Phase 2)



DISP (10) DISP IMG Reg. W/R/V Test $39

DISP (11) Buf Count Reg. W/R/V Test $3A *

DISP (12) Buf Reg. W/R/V Test $3B

DISP (13) Buf Size Reg. W/R/V Test $3C *

DISP (14) VSYNC Interrupt Test $3D

DISP (15) IFB W/R/V Test $3E *

DISP (16) DAS Buf W/R/V Test $3F *



2242063



REV 0


Table 1–7 MISC Test



MISC (1) WR Reg. Intro W Test $2F

MISC (2) Inter Status R Test $2F

MISC (3) WR CC Inter Mask W Test $2F

MISC (4) Test Mode W Test $2F

MISC (5) INT Mask CTL W Test $2F

MISC (6) OC I/F Dual Port RAM R Test $2E

MISC (7) XG Status R Test $2D

MISC (8) Scan key SW Data Reg. R Test $2C

MISC (9) Scan PNL display Enable W Test $2C

MISC (10) Scan Panel Lamp On Test $2C

MISC (11) Auto Voice CTL W Test $2B

MISC (12) Voice Time Data R Test $2B

MISC (13) SM Buzz CRL W Test $2B

MISC (14) Scan Key Status A,B R Test $2C

MISC (15) GTX P–On Status R Test $2A

MISC (16) KB Key Code–Reg./Status R Test $29

MISC (17) KB Lamp Reg. W/R/V Test $29

MISC (18) KB Beep Reg. W Test $29

MISC (19) Track Ball CNT R Test $28

MISC (20) TPC I/F Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $27 *

MISC (21) MFC Status R Test $26

MISC (22) MFC Write Reg. W, Read Reg. R Test $26

MISC (23) Scan INT Mask CTL W Test $25

MISC (24) XG Control W Test $24



2242063



REV 0

1-4 ERROR CODE

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the CPW fails during the power–up sequence due to the Operatingsystem failure.

Table 1–8 Error Code

LED Status Condition Remedy

D0 Bus error due to accessing nonexistentmemory address or executing inade-quate instruction.

Suspect memory or reload software.

D1 Address error due to word reference toodd address.


D2 ∼ D8 Exception due to incorrect instruction orcorrupted memory.


E0 Abnormal termination due to abort of OSrelated task.

Error information is stored in crashsave area.

E1 Abnormal operation system. Error information is stored in crashsave area.


2242063



REV 0

1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA

When abnormal termination is caused by any failure (Bus Error, Address Error, or OS task crash), error informationis stored into an area of Memory called the ‘Crash Save Area’. Each processor has a Crash Save Area.

The Crash Save Area contains the following information:

Program Counter Status Register at crashOther registers LED status

For details, see illustration 1–3.

The Crash Save Area on each processor is saved onto the hard disk at power–on. You can also save this informationonto floppy diskette as shown in illustration 1–4. Use the following procedure to transfer Crash Save Area informationto floppy diskette.

Under crash condition:

1. Label a crash save floppy diskette and insert it into the floppy disk drive.

NoteThe first time you use this diskette, initialize it for a crash save according to Appendix A, How to MakeCrash Save disk.

2. Pull the system reset switch with the diskette in place to automatically transfer a copy of the crash save areaof each processor onto the diskette. The system rest switch is located beneath OC keyboard console extension.

3. Use the following procedure to read the contents of the diskette.

a. Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.

b. Set the BOOT select switch on the CPW board to the following positions:

43

21

ON

c. Pull the system reset switch.

d. Make sure the ‘>’ prompt appears on the CRT monitor, and then remove the BOOT diskette and inset thecrash cave diskette.

e. The diskette contents should resemble illustration 1–4.


2242063



REV 0

1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)

Illustration 1–3 Crash Save Area

Crash Save Area Address A00(H) – AFF(H)RelativeAddress

0 Program Counter (4 Byte)

(spare)

6 Status Register (2 Byte)

8 Register D0 (4 Byte per Each)

:

:

D7

A0

:

:

A7

48 User Stack Pointer (4 Byte)

4C Bus Error Vector (4 Byte)

50 Function (2 Byte)

52 Access Address (4 Byte) Access Address when Bus error or address errorhas occurs

56 Command Register (2 Byte)has occurs. Applicable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.

58 Status Register (2 Byte)A licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.

5A Program Counter (4 Byte) Program address causing Bus error / addresserrorerror.Applicable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.

64 LED Status (1 Byte) (Spare)A licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.

70 Date (4 Byte)File Processor ONLY

74 Time (4 Byte)File Processor ONLY.

(Spare)

80 Error Status (1 Byte) DMAC CER (1 Byte)

82 DMA Transfer Address (4 Byte)

86 Reserved HDC Command Code

88 HD Physical Sector Number (4 Byte)

90 HDC Command Parameter (16 Byte)

A0 HDC Result Parameter (16 Byte)

FE (Spare)


2242063



REV 0

1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)

Illustration 1–4 Crash Save onto Floppy Disk

micro:textC

micro:textC8

Crash System Reset Save

CPW Memory

A00(H)

0

B00(H)

B00(H)

Crash Save AreaFloppy Disk

Sector 0

> FN FDMP:0.&.DUMP.SY ‘CR’FDMP:0000 .DUMP .SY (00,00)> FD 0 10 ‘CR’000000 00 00 54 3C 00 33 20 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 09 ..T<....8.......000010 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 40 00 00 00 06 00 02 09 90 [email protected] 00 01 26 CA 00 01 28 CA 00 01 31 16 00 00 0C 00 ..&...<....]....000030 00 00 53 E2 00 01 26 CA 00 FF 31 00 00 02 09 C0 ..S...&...1.....000040 00 01 38 00 00 00 0B EE 00 01 29 8E 00 00 24 52 ..8.......>...&R000050 10 35 00 FF 03 81 10 28 20 00 00 00 67 E4 00 00 .5......<...G...000060 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................000070 00 00 0A F1 02 94 10 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................000080 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................000090 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000A0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000B0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000C0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000D0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000E0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................0000F0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................>

CPW CrashSave Area


2242063



blank


2242063



REV 0

SECTION 2 – OFF–LINE TEST

2-1 GENERAL

2-1-1 Overview

The off–line tests for diagnosing each of the following electronic boards and some components (Hard disk drive, AudioAssy, etc.) installed within the Operator Console are provided on each separate floppy diskettes.

� CPW

� MISC (and TPC)

� DISP

� IPU

� SBPU

The off–line tests for MISC include communication tests between CPW and the processor equipped within the Gantry.

The off–line tests perform more extensive diagnostics than the on–line tests described in the previous section.The off–line tests report which device or operation is the cause of a system or information system failure.

The off–line tests except for the CPW board are provided on floppy diskettes. The off–line test for the CPW boardis provided on the ROM on the CPW board. The off–line tests are interactive ones, requiring an external display termi-nal.

The test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the CPW status LEDs aswell as on the display. The status LEDs turn off when all the off–line tests have been finished without an error.

Illustration 2–1 shows the general flow of the off–line tests except the ETC off–line test.


2242063



REV 0

2-1-1 Overview (continued)

Illustration 2–1 General Flow of Off–Line Test

Failed

System Off–Line Test

Primary Test for CPW

Error Code Displayed on LEDs

Main Menu for Off–Line Test

Power–On

CPW Test

MISC Test

DISP Test

IPU Test

SBPU Test

Passed

ROM

FD

FD

FD

FD

Note: To exit the off–line test, set the Dip SWon the CPW board and reset the system.


2242063



REV 0

2-1-2 External Display T erminal

Terminal Settings

Use a display terminal which accepts ASCII characters. The settings for the terminal are described below:

� X Parameter (XON and XOFF Control): not effective

� Character Length: 8 bits

� Parity: none

� Stop Bit Length: 1 bit

� Rate (Communication Speed): 9600, 1200, 2400, or 19200 (bits/s) This set should be the same as theset value by the Test Dip Switch on the CPW Board. see illustration 2–2.

� Carriage Return Code: CR+LF ($0D $0A)

� Carriage Return: automatic at a line end

� Local Echo: none (The off–line test program echos back).

Key Function

The following Table shows the keys used for the test programs.

Table 2–1 Key Function

Key Function

0∼9, A∼F Selection of test items; Values to be entered

– Range designator (used for address designation)

RET Enter; Execution of a step

Q Abort

SPACE Pause (toggle operation)

others ignored


2242063



REV 0

2-1-3 Extension Boards

Either one of two kinds of extension boards is used depending on the circuit board, as shown below:

� EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) is only used for: IPU, DISP, SBPU.

� EXTDR Assy (P9500YY) is only used for: other boards listed above (CPW , MISC, other) .

CAUTION

Board Destruction!Do not use the EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) for boards other than IPU, DISP , SBPU, or for otherslots except for IPU, DISP, SBPU; otherwise, the board installed to the EXTDR2 Assy, andsome other boards together will be destructed.


2242063



REV 0

2-2 OFF–LINE TEST OPERATION

2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test

Set the Test Switch on the CPW board according to illustration below, and switch ON or reset the system. Then thefollowing is performed in the described order:

Illustration 2–2 Off–Line Test Dip Switch Setting

87654321

NormallyOFF

ON :1OFF :0

1 2 3 Test Mode Selection 7 8 Communication Speed(Unit: Baud)

1 X X Test Skip 0 0 9600

0 1 X OFF–Line Test 0 1 1200

0 0 1 Power On Test 2 1 0 2400

0 0 0 Power On Test 1 1 1 19200

X: Don’t Care. The following parameters are set by default witheach speed setting and cannot be cancelled;–

1. Character length = 8 bits2. Stop Bit = 1 bit3. Party = None

� Execution of the Power On CPW SRAM W/R/V Test (1) (LED: $11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Creation of Interrupt Vector Table and Setting of Stack Pointer

� Initialization of devices

� Calling the test (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or Off–Line Test) according to the Test Switch setting.

Processing for Error Interrupt

If an error interrupt listed below occurs, the YMON (YMS Monitor) program is called.

� Bust error Interrupt (LED: $10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Address Error Interrupt (LED: $10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Undefined Interrupt (LED: $10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063



REV 0

2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test (continued)

Processing for Abort

When the Abort switch is pressed, which is always accepted by the system, the YMON is called.

Primary T est for CPW Board

Prior to displaying the off–line test menu, the primary tests are performed on the CPW Board as listed below. If anerror occurs during the tests, the off–line tests can not be called. These are the same as the tests performed in thePower On Test. Refer to Tables 1–2 and 1–4.

� CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM) (LED: $12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (2) ROM Sum Check Test (LED: $13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test (LED: $14). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (4) Control/Status Register W/R/V Test (LED: $15). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (5) DMAC Register W/R/V Test (LED: $16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (7) FDC Register W/R Test (LED: $17). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/R/V Test (1) (LED: $18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� CPW (12) DMA (CPW–DRAM) Test (LED: $19). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063



REV 0

2-2-2 Off–Line T est Main Menu

After the CPW primary tests are finished without an error, the following menu is displayed:

– – – – – OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU – – – – –

1) CPW BOARD TEST2) OTHER BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)

SELECT MENU > _

The off–line tests except for the CPW Board are provided on floppy diskettes. When ‘2’ is selected in the above menu,the following is displayed:

– – – – – OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU – – – – –

1) CPW BOARD TEST2) OTHER BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)

SELECT MENU > 2

MOUNT PROGRAM FD (requesting the floppy diskette to be mounted in the drive)HIT RET KEY !

(Set the floppy diskette and press the ‘Return’ key)TEST–PROGRAM LOADING

OFF–LINE TEST Loading File = xxxxxxxx

LOADING COMPLETE !

xxxx OFF–LINE TEST Rev.xx

(displays test menus)...


2242063



REV 0

2-3 CPW OFF–LINE TEST

2-3-1 Required Hardware

� CPW Assy

� IPU Assy

� SBB Assy

� HDD

� FDD

� Display Terminal

2-3-2 Test Items (CPW Off–Line T est)

Table 2–2 CPW Off–Line T est Items

Test Test Item LED Hardware to be CheckedTestNo.

Test Item LEDStatus CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

1 Loop Test (Power On Test2) $1F HD

2 CPW–DRAM Write/Read/Verify Test $1F

3 SRAM Write/Read/Verify Test $1F

4 HD Test $1F

1) HD Write/Read/Verify Test $1F HD

2) HD Self–diagnostics $1F HD

3) HD Formatting $1F HD

5 FD Test $1F

1) FD Write/Read/Verify Test $1F FD

2) FD Formatting $1F FD

6 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test1 (DRAM → DRAM) $1F

2) Bus Error Test $1F

7 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test2 (DRAM → IPU MD) $1F

8 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test3 (DRAM → HD) $1F HD

9 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test4 (DRAM → FD) $1F FD

: Hardware to be checked. : Hardware concerned in the check.


2242063



REV 0

2-4 IPU OFF–LINE TEST


� IPU Assy

� CPW Assy (This board must be operate normally.)

� FDD


� FD (IPU Off–Line Test Software : P9190ZB)

2-4-2 Test Item (IPU Off–Line Test)

Table 2–3 IPU Off–Line T est Items

Test Test ItemHardware to be CheckedTest

No.Test Item

CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

1 Extended MD Register Read Test

2 Sequential Test Extended MD Slot 1,2

3 System Bus Access Test Extended MD Slot 1,2

4 Program Fetch Test

5 i860 Driver Test

6 Basic Function Test Extended MD Slot 1,2

7 Basic Subroutine Test

8 Memory Module Test Extended MD Slot 1,2


2242063



REV 0

2-4-3 Test Items Description

� Extended MD Register Read T estTests the read operation of the Extended MD Register, which contain the information of the equipped MDcapacity and address. The correct result of this test must be confirmed prior to performing the followingtests.

� Sequential T estPerforms the System Bus Access Test (3) to Basic Subroutine Test (7) sequentially. The following testsare not performed in this test.

Extended MD Register Read Test (1)A part of Basic Function Test (6)

Memory Module Test (8)

� System Bus Access T estTests registers and memory which can be accessed via the System bus.

� Program Fetch T estTests mainly fetch of the programs residing in the MD vector area.

� i860 Driver T estTests the driver programs required for execution of the i860 application software

� Basic Function TestTests the i860 basic functions, such as memory read/write using the driver programs, and simultaneousmemory access, which are required for execution of the i860 complex application software.

� Basic Subroutine T estTests more dynamical operations, using the basic subroutines which are used in the application programs.

� Memory Module TestTests each SIMM constituting the IPU MD.


2242063



REV 0

2-5 DISP OFF–LINE TEST


� DISP Assy

� CPW Assy

� IPU Assy

� 14” CRT

� FDD


� FD (DISP Off–Line Test Software : P9190ZC)

2-5-2 Test Menu Screen

After the initialization of the DISP Off–line Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.

– – – – – – DISPLAY OFF LINE TEST – – – – – –

1) *SELECT TEST ITEM (SEQUENTIAL TEST)2) SELECT TEST MODE (SINGLE)3) RUN4) END

ENTER NO. _

If you select 1), the terminal displays the list of all the tests.The asterisk (*) indicates that the menu item is currently selected.


2242063



REV 0

2-5-3 Test Items (DISP Off–Line T est)

Table 2–4 DISP Off–Line T est Items

Test Test ItemHardware to be CheckedTest

No.Test Item

CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others

1 Sequential Test

2 ACTC Pattern RAM Write/Read/Verify Test

3 OVL Plane Control Register Write Test

4 DISP Control Register Write/Read/Verify Test

5 Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test

6 VSYNC Interrupt Test

7 OVL Plane Memory Write/Read/Verify Test

8 ACRTC DMA Test

9 OVL Plane Control Test

10 OVL Scroll Test

11 OVL Split Test

12 OVL Test Pattern

13 DISP Image Register Write/Read\Verify Test

14 Buffer Count Register Write/Read/Verify Test

15 Buffer Size Register Write/Read/Verify Test

16 VSYNC interrupt Test

17 IFB Write/Read/Verify Test

18 IFB Write/Read/Verify Test

19 DAS Buffer Write/Read/Verify Test

20 IFB Display Test

21 OVL Test Pattern & IFB Display Test


2242063



REV 0

2-6 MISC OFF–LINE TEST

NoteAlways rest the system after finishing the MISC OFF–LINE TEST, otherwise, a system error will oc-cur if this or other off–line test is run.


� MISC Assy

� CPW Assy

� TPC Assy

� TPC SUB Assy

� FDD

� TOUCH PNL

� LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

� AUDIO Assy

� PNL Assy

� PNL IF Assy

� KB SUB Assy

� Trackball / Keyboard

� SBB Assy


� FD (MSC OFF–LINE TEST Software : P9190ZD)

2-6-2 Test Menu Screen

After the initialization of the MISC Off–line Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.

– – – – – – MISC OFF LINE TEST – – – – – –

1) TEST SELECT & RUN2) PANEL INTERFACE TEST3) TPC INTERFACE TEST4) KB/TB INTERFACE TEST5) OC INTERFACE TEST6) MFC CTL TEST7) RS232C TEST0) END

ENTER NO. _


2242063



REV 0

2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line T est)

Table 2–5 MISC Off–Line T est Items



1 Panel Interface Test

1) Lamp Test $2B PNL Assy

2) Key Switch Test $2C PNL I/F Assy

3) Touch Panel Buzzer Test $2B

2 Audio Interface Test

1) Play Test $2B Audio Assy

2) Play Back Test $2B

3) Record Test $2B

4) Time Data Test $2B

5) Bank Memory W/R/V Test $2B

6) Load Test $2B

7) Dump Test $2B

8) Auto Voice Load/Dump/Verify Test $2B

3 TPC Interface Test

1) Touch Panel Display Test $27 TPC, TPC Sub Assy

2) Touch Panel Sense Test $27 LCD Touch Panel

3) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $27 TPC Assy

4 Keyboard/Trackball Interface Test

1) Key Switch Test $29 KB Sub Assy

2) Trackball Test $28 Keyboard

T kb ll3) Buzzer Test $29 Trackball


2242063



REV 0

2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line T est) (continued)

Table 2–5 MISC Off–Line Test Items (continued)



5 OC Interface Test

1) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $2E

2) OCIF Internal Loop Test $2E

3) CPW–OCIF–MP Communication Test $2E

4) CPW–OCIF–MP–TP Communication Test $2E

5) CPW–OCIF–MP–GP Communication Test $2E

6) CPW–OCIF–MP–SP Communication Test $2E

7) CPW–OCIF–MP–SP–XG Comm. Test $2E

6 MFC Control Test

1) MFC Dual Port RAM W/R Test $26

2) MFC Status Test $26

3) MFC Interrupt Clear Test $26

7 RS232C Test

1) CBF SIO → AUX SIO Test $2F RS232C LoopConnector

2) CBF SIO ← AUX SIO Test $2FConnector


2242063



REV 0

2-7 SBPU OFF–LINE TEST


� SBPU Assy

� CPW Assy

� IPU Assy

� FDD

� SBB Assy


� FD (SBPU OFF–LINE TEST Software : P9190ZE)

2-7-2 Test Items (SBPU Off–Line T est)

Table 2–6 SBPU Off–Line T est Items


Test Item LEDStatus CPW IPU DISP MISC SBPU Others

1 Memory Access Test

1) Pixel memory Write/Read/Verify Test $51

2) Convolved Data Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $52

3) Initial Channel Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $53

4) Sizing Image Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $54

5) Channel Increment Register W/R/V Test $55

6) Rotate Register Write/Read/Verify Test $56

7) Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test $57

2 Back Projection Test $58


2242063



REV 0

SECTION 3 – ETC BOARD TEST

The ETC Test programs contain the following:

� ETC POWER–ON TEST

� ETC OFF–LINE TEST

� ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION

NoteEach test for the ETC does not depend on OC self–diagnostics test (Power–ON/Off–Line tests), sothat both self–diagnostics tests of OC and ETC can be performed at the same time.


2242063



REV 0

3-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST

3-1-1 General

The ETC (DC–X Ethernet Controller Interface) Power–ON Test program is used for ETC self–diagnostics during thePower up sequence, and is resident in the ROM on the ETC assy.

During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identifiedin ETC LEDs.

If at any point during the Power–ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the error code displayson the ETC LEDs.

3-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs

The lower byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC process, the ETC Power–ON Test and current status in start–up sequence,and the upper byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC status.

Illustration 3–1 ETC Board LED Configuration

MSB (bit 15)bit 14

:::

bit 8bit 7

bit 1LSB (bit 0)

(For Hardware)

Current Status (Interrupt etc.)

ETC Status Routine

:


2242063



REV 0

3-1-3 Running the Test

Switch Setting

Set the DIP switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:

� SW8A – Power ON test Perform/Skip. Off–Line test setting.

Illustration 3–2 ETC Dip Switch Setting

4321

ON ‘1’

‘0’

B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’


B2 : Off–Line Test:‘0’ – Not perform test‘1’ – Perform test

B3 : Power On Test:‘0’ – Perform test‘1’ – Skip test

NoteThe DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing theDIP switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want tochange the parameters, first set the DIP SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start thetest.


2242063



REV 0

3-1-3 Running the Test (continued)

Test Sequence

The illustration 3–3 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the ETC test programs, including Power On Test proce-dure, and where the results are displayed in LEDs.

Illustration 3–3 ETC Test Sequence Flowchart

Status

ETC P–ONTest

System Test program ETC LEDActivity

ETC Off–LineTest

ETC Initializing&

Starting UpProcedure

OKTest Number$01–$21

Start(Power On orReset)

OK

OK

Status Test Number$39–$40

Test Group$40–$8X

Status

EndSystemPreparation

$FF–$00Hardware test

$90

NoteThe ETC Off–Line test can be skipped by changing the ETC Dip switch setting (SW8A). For detailinformation of this test, refer to Section 3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST.


2242063



REV 0

3-1-4 LED Indications

Test Items

Table 3–1 ETC Board LED Status (Power–On/Off–Line Test)

DescriptionLED Status (�:Illuminate)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hardware Test Mode Check ��

LANCE (Ethernet Controller LSI) Invalid Access Check ��

DRAM Invalid Access Check ��

Dual Port RAM Invalid Access Check ��

ETC Control Register Invalid Access Check ��

Invalid Address Access Check ��

SRAM Access check (Byte Mode) ��

SRAM Access Check (Word Mode) ��

SRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode) ��

Copying Program Initialized by CPU to SRAM ��

Executing CPU Initialized Program ��

EPROM Writing Check (Verify Bus Error) ��

LANCE Interrupt Control Register Test ��

System Bus Interrupt control Register Test ��

Serial Port Interrupt Test ��

System Bus Interrupt Test ��

DRAM/Dual Port RAM control Register Test ��

DRAM Access Check (Byte Mode) ��

DRAM Access Check (Word Mode) ��

DRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode) ��

Dual Poet RAM Access Check ��

LANCE Control Register Test ��

LANCE Internal Loop Back Test ��

LANCE Collision Detect & Retry Test ��

LANCE External Loop Back Test ��

Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 1) ��

Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 2) ��

ETC Off–line Test is being executed ��

Hardware Test End ��


2242063



REV 0

3-1-4 LED Indications (continued)

Table 3–2 ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & Starting–Up)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Supervisor Stack Pointer is being Set ��

Creating ‘Exception Vector Table’ ��

SRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped) ��

DRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped) ��

Setting Initialization of Selected OS ��

OS Initialization ��

Serial Port Initialize ��

System Clock Initialization ��

System Bus I/F Initialization ��

RT Scope Pointer Initialization is being Set ��

RT Scope Initialization ��

RT Scope Start ��

Basic Task On ROM is being Executed ��

Memory Partition is being Set ��

Queue is being Set ��

Semaphore Flag is being Made ��

Mail Post is being Created/First Mail Transmit ��

Alternate Table or Pointer is being Set ��

System Clock Start ��

System Bus Interrupt Open (ETC Board is able to Communicate with CPU) ��

OS Start (Task Management Start) ��


2242063



REV 0

3-1-4 LED Indications (continued)

Table 3–2 ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & Starting–Up) (continued)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Special ETC Data is being Set ��

ETC Preparation End/Waiting for Execute command from CPU ��

Execute command Received from CPU ��

Informing CPU of Execute Command ��

Requesting I/F Manager Loading from CPU ��

I/F Manager Loading is being Executed ��

I/F Manager Loading End ��

I/F Manager Start ��

Initialize Process Completed on ROM ��

Necessary Program is being loaded from CPU ��

ETC Application Program Management Start ��


2242063



REV 0

3-1-5 Error Code

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the ETC fails during the power–up sequence.

Table 3–3 ETC Board Exception LED Status


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ROM Level does not match Program Level ��

CPU Packet Writing Error ��

CPU Packet Transmit error ��

Work Area is not Sufficient ��

File Read Error ��

Anything else Fatal Error ��

IP Address for Myself is not Set ��

Ethernet Address is not Set ��

LANCE Initiate Error ��

Initial Error of Memory for LANCE ��

LANCE Initial Timeout ��

Bus Error ��

Address Error ��

Breach Command ��

Division by Zero ��

CHK/CHK2 Command ��

TRAPcc/TRAPV Command ��

Privilege Breach ��

Execute Trace on Invalid Condition ��

Line 1010 Emulator ��

Line 1111 Emulator ��

Hardware Break Point on Invalid Condition ��

Processor Protocol Breach ��

Format Error ��

In–Initial Interrupt ��

Standby RAM Destroyed/ETC Special Data is not Set ��


2242063



REV 0

3-1-5 Error Code (continued)

Table 3–3 ETC Board Exception LED Status (continued)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SPRIUS Interrupt (Hardware Invalid) ��

Interrupt to Undefined Auto Vector ��

Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 1 or 1) ��

Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 16 ∼ 23) ��




Undefined Exception Occurrence (Except Above) ��

Undefined TRAP Occurrence ��

Table 3–4 ETC Board Current LED Status

DescriptionLED Status

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Fatal Hardware Error � � � � � � � �

Fatal Software Error � � � � � � � �

ETC is Currently Stopped by Fatal Error � � � � � � � �

Waiting for Response Packet from CPU � � � � � � � �

Waiting for ACK from System Bus � � � � � � � �

Interrupt from LANCE is Currently Managed � � � � � � � �

PANIC in TCP/IP Driver � � � � � � � �

Idling Task is Currently Executed (Flashing) � � � � � � � �

� : Illuminate � : Flashing


2242063



REV 0

3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST

NoteVerify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet before entering this test. If this test is runwhit systems communicated, the communication data will be destroyed.

3-2-1 General

The Off–line test for the ETC Board is provided on the ROM on the ETC Board. The Off–line tests are interactive ones,requiring an external display terminal.

The ETC test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the ETC status LEDsas well as on the terminal display. The Status LEDs turn off when all the Off–line tests have been finished without anerror.

3-2-2 Required hardware

� ETC Assy

� AUI Cable

� Transceiver


NoteIf the ETC board is not connected to the transceiver of the Ethernet cable via the AUI cable, set theEthernet loop back test disable on the operation mode selection screen. See illustration 3–5.


2242063



REV 0

3-2-3 Switch Setting

Set the Dip switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:

� SW8A – Power On Test Perform/Skip. Off–Line test setting.

Illustration 3–4 ETC Dip Switch Setting (Off–Line Test)

4321

ON ‘1’

‘0’



B2 : Off–Line Test:‘0’ – Not perform test‘1’ – Perform test

B3 : Power On Test:‘0’ – Perform test‘1’ – Skip test

NoteThe Dip switch setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing theDip switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to changethe parameters, first set the Dip switch accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.


2242063



REV 0

3-2-4 External display T erminal

Refer to Section 2-1-2, External Display Terminal, in this Operator Console tab.

3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation

1. Verify that the Dip switch (SW8A) on the ETC board is set to $C or $4 position (Off–Line Test ON).

2. Connect the external display terminal to the CN4 of the ETC Board.

3. Verify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet.

4. Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console. (The following displays on the external display terminal.)

5. Enternet the appropriate values for the operation mode, referring to the following table. Entries will be performedin the shaded region of the illustration below.

Illustration 3–5 Operation Mode Selection

MC68332 initialization completed.ETC Board initialization completed......12.256MByte available.entering to OFFLINE test mode.....– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –ETC (Ethernet Controller interface) OFFLINE TEST v.0.00– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –Select test_execution mode.([0]:sequential mode or [1]:separate mode):[0]= 0 or 1Select error_indication mode.([0]:stop on error or [1]:non_stop on error):[0]= 0 or 1Select test_skip mode.([0]:external loop back test – –>[0]:enable or [1]:disable):[0]= 0 or 1

Item Entered Number

0 1

Test Execution Mode All tests are performed. Only selected tests are performed.

Error Indication Mode When error occurs, error information is dis-played and the test is terminated.

When error occurs, error information isdisplayed, but the test proceeds.

Test Skip Mode External loop back test can be performed. External loop back test is skipped.

Note

� Normally select ‘0’ to all entry items.

� when the AUI cable is not connected to the ETC board, always select ‘1’ in response to ‘Select test_skipmode’.


2242063



REV 0

3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation (continued)

6. The test menu screen appears on the terminal. Always select ‘0’ to perform all Off–Line tests in response to ‘Select Test Number’.

– – – – – – – MENU – – – – – – –0=Internal bus/bus error test0=Control/Status register test

.

.Select test number: 0 ‘CR’

The Off–Line test is performed automatically. It takes approximately 30 minutes to complete all tests. For each testtime and LED status, see the following:

Test Item LED Status Test Time (min.)

0 : Internal bus/bus error test $02 ∼ $06 3

1 : Control/Status register test $10 ∼ $14 2

2 : SRAM write/verify test $07 ∼ $0B 6

3 : DRAM write/verify test $15 ∼ $17 4

4 : dual port RAM write/verify test $18 1

5 : LANCE diagnostic test $19 ∼ $1C 6

6 : Internal bus arbitration test $20 ∼ $21 6

Note : At the moment ETC Off–Line Test is executed, LED status is $39.

NoteTo terminate the Off–Line test during execution, press the <C> key while holding the <Control> key.


2242063



REV 0

3-3 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION

This test is performed to check if the Ethernet address data back–uped by the internal battery to the ETC board isstored without error. If data is destroyed, first check if the internal battery has been consumed. Weak battery can notback up the Ethernet data into the RAM. (Normally for 5 to 10 years, the internal battery can be used without replace-ment.)

1. Connect the external terminal display to the CN4 of the ETC board.

2. Set the Dip switch (location:S6A) to the $4 position.

4321

ON ‘1’

‘0’

S6A

3. Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console.The ETC Power–On test is executed. After approximately 30 seconds, the status LEDs are displayed as follows:

15 8 7 0

4. ETC initial setting screen appears on the terminal. Check if each item is set to the proper value according to theTable below.

Item Entry Example

Manufactured Data 1994/03/03

Manufactured Time 12:34

Serial Number 0012 (Enter the same number as the ETC board.)

Ethernet Address OC (Enter the number that decodes the serial number (decimal) into the hexa–decimal.)

5. Enter ‘y’ in response to ‘Are you sure (y/n)?’ to verify that the ETC board initial setting is properly done.

6. Verify that the ETC status LEDs are displayed as follows:

15 8 7 0


2242063



REV 0

SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION

The LEDs on circuit boars installed on the nest chassis indicate various status information.The information in this section can be a help o identify failures occurred on boards.

4-1 CPW

TEST76543210RESETINTERRUPTHALTFAIL

These LEDs show the status during the Power–On Testand Off–Line Test.Refer to P–ON test to see more details.


2242063



REV 0

4-2 IPU2

Status76543210

Status LEDAfter the system starts up with no errors, bit 1 LED onlyflashes at interval of approx. 1 second. Bit 0 ∼ 7 LEDs arenormally extinguished.

When performing reconstruction, bit 2 LED only is lit ON.Others are normally extinguished.


2242063



REV 0

4-3 DISP

OVL (Overlay)It is lit ON when OVL screen is ON.(OVL screen is controlled by OVL ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)

IMG (Image)It is lit ON when IFB (Image Frame Buffer) screen is ON.(IFB screen is controlled by IMG ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)

FB1 (Frame Buffer 1)It is lit ON when FM1 (Frame Memory 1) displays.(FM0/FM1 selection is controlled by IMG bit of DISPLAY IMG REG.)

DB1 (DAS Buffer 1)It is lit ON when BUF1 is connected to IO BUs.(BUF0/BUF1 selection to connect IO BUS is controlled by BUF bit ofBUF REG.)

VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization)It is lit ON during VSYNC.

SBUS (System Bus)It is lit ON during access from SYSTEM BUS.

DMA (Direct Memory Access)It is lit ON during DMA to ACRTC.

IO BUSIt is lit ON during access from IO BUS.

OVLIMGFB1DB1

VSYNCSBUSDMAIOBUS


2242063



REV 0

4-4 MISC

Test76543210

LED MFC Status

$00 MFC Not Ready$02 Rec. Mag. is Not Installed$03 Sup. Mag. is Not Installed$04 Film Empty or Sup. Mag. Shutter is Not Open$05 Waiting Supply Command$06 Waiting Expose Command$07 CRT Positioning$08 Exposing$09 Expose n Complete$0A Resetting$0B Supply Error$0C Receive error$0D RAM Check Error 2000H$0E RAM Check Error 3000H$0F 7 Seg. No Light (Flashing)$10 Developper Not Ready$11 Rec. Mag. Full$16 Film Overlap Error$17 Lens Positioning Error$1B Communication Error (Send)$1C Video Signal Error$1D Communication Error (Receive)$1F Copy Mode (SSI Only)

3210

Status LEDThese LEDs indicate status of Multi Format Camera.

(Not Used)ROM SUM Check:

NO: ErrorOFF:No Error

(Not Used)Communication Program:

BLINK : Program Runs.ON or OFF: Program does Not Run.


2242063



REV 0

4-5 ISC

DSR (DTR)DCDRI(Not Used)

RSTDMADTE0DTE1

DSR (DTR)DCDRI(Not Used)

For Serial Channel 0

For Serial Channel 1

DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE(Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).

DCD (Data Carrier Detected):It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (DataCommunication Equipment, i.e. Modem).

RI (Ringing Indicator):It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (DataCommunication Equipment, i.e. Modem)

RST (Reset):It is lit ON when the system is reset or the register reset on theISC board is performed.

DMA (Direct Memory Access Busy):It is lit ON when SCA (Serial Communication Adapter) occupyon – board BUS for DMA.

DTE0 (CH0: Data Terminal Ready):It is lit ON when the serial channel 0 is set as DTE (i.e. Termi-nal) using Dip switch.

DTE1 (CH1: Data terminal Ready):It is lit ON when the serial channel 1 is set as DTE (i.e. Termi-nal) using Dip switch.

DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE(Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).

DCD (Data Carrier Detected):It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (DataCommunication Equipment, i.e. Modem).

RI (Ringing Indicator):It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data TerminalEquipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (DataCommunication Equipment, i.e. Modem)


2242063



REV 0

4-6 ODC2 (OPTION)

Status LEDThese indicate, the status of ODC2 test specified by test SW on ODC2.

FULLEMPCRCCEN

Status

(Not Used)

FULL, EMPThese LED indicate the status of the FIFO buffer.

� ‘FULL’ is lit ON when the FIFO is full.� ‘EMP’ is lit ON when the FIFO is empty.

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)It is lit ON when CRC error occurs during reading data.

CEN (CRC Enable)It is lit ON when CRC is generated during writing data or when CRC ischecked during reading data.

BEN (Buffer Enable)It is lit ON during transferring 512 byte data.

BEN


2242063



REV 0

4-7 MTC (OPTION)

FULL, HALF, EMPThese indicate number of data stored in 8kbyte FIFO Oneof Three is lit ON according to the followings.

FULL : 8KbyteHALF : 4K ∼ 8KbyteEMP : 0 byte

FULLHALFEMP(Not Used)

INTRDMA(Not Used)FAIL

T3210

INTR (Interrupt)It is lit ON when interruption to MPU occurs.(e.g., DMA completion, command packet receipt, bus error)

DMA (Direct Memory Access)It is lit ON during DMA on MTC.

FAIL (Device Fail)It is lit ON when MT unit power is turned off or control cableis not connected.

T3 ∼ 0 (Test Status)Not used. Normally all LEDs are extinguished.


2242063



REV 0

4-8 ETC (OPTION)

Refer to Section 3. ETC Board Test.


2242063


OPERATOR CONSOLEA–1

REV 0

APPENDIX A – CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE

1. Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.

2. Set the boot select switch on CPW board as follows:

43

21

ON

3. Pull the system reset switch.

4. Initialize the diskette as follows:

a. Enter VINITS at keyboard.

NoteVINITS, not VINIT, command must be entered.

b. Remove the BOOT diskette, and insert a scratch diskette into the floppy disk drive.

Do not forget to set the write protect tab to the OFF position. (Write enable the scratch floppy.)

c. Enter parameters for diskette initialize.

> VINITS ‘CR’WHAT DEVICE (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FD00 ‘CR’ – – – – – – (FD Device Name)FLEXIBLE DISK: 2–DENSITY 2–SIDED** TOTAL sector: 3991 **VOLUME NAME: FD00DESCRIPTION: ggggggggggggggggggggDO YOU WANT TO FORMAT DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’** FORMATTING! **** FORMATTED OK! **DO YOU WANT TO VALIDATE SECTORS (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’ – – – (FD Initialize Request)VOLUME NAME (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FDMP ‘CR’ – – – (Volume Name)USER NUMBER ? 0 ‘CR’ – – – (User No.)DESCRIPTION (MAX. 20 CHARA.) ? CRASH SAVE AREA ‘CR’DO YOU WANT IPLT LOADING (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’DO YOU WANT SYSTEM DUMP AREA (Y/N/Q/) ? Y ‘CR’ – (Dump File Allocate Request)WHAT FILE NAME (MAX. 8 CHARA.) ? DUMP ‘CR’ – (Dump File Name)HOW MANY SECTORS (DECIMAL) ? 8 ‘CR’** INITIALIZING ! **** INITIALIZED: OK ! ****** VINITS DONE ****VINITS: TERMINATED>


2242063


OPERATOR CONSOLEA–2

blank


2242063


TABLE/GANTRYi

REV 0

TABLE / GANTRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 LED DESCRIPTION 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1-1 TGP Board 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp. 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – TGP POWER–ON TEST 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 – TGP OFF–LINE TEST 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-2 Sequential Function Test 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-4 Table Processor Bit Table 3–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 GANTRY PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST 3–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1 I/O Port Status Check 3–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-2 Sequential Function Test 3–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check 3–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-4 Gantry Processor Bit Table 3–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-1 Flow Chart 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-2 Servo Alarm 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-3 Resetting the Servo Alarm 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2 SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SERVO AMP. (P9153SF) 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


TABLE/GANTRYii

blank


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY1–1

REV 0

SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS

1-1 LED DESCRIPTION

1-1-1 TGP Board

The TGP board has 16 Status LEDs.

ERRA Gantry Processor detected an error, or Gantry Processor is in an error condition.

This LED lights when error(s) occurred in the Gantry Processor System.(e.g.) � RAM Check Error

� ROM Check Error� Gantry Azimuth Initialize Error

Refer to the TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.

LOOPA Indicates that the interval timer function of the Gantry Processor is operating. Flashes ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’for every second cycle during normal Gantry Processor operation.

REQA The Gantry Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor (CPW).

MNLA Lights up while the Gantry Processor executing a manual mode Program.

ERRB Table Processor detected an error, or Table Processor in sin an error condition.

This LED lights when error(s) occur in the Table Processor System.(e.g.) � RAM Check Error

� ROM check Error� MISC ↔ Table Processor Serial communication error

Refer to TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.

LOOPB Indicates that the interval timer function of the Table Processor is operating. Flashes ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’for every second cycle during normal Table Processor operation.

REQB The Table Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor.

MNLB Lights up while the Table Processor executing a manual mode Program.

HVON Lights up when the TGP outputs the ‘HV ON’ signal to the X–ray Generator.

DTRIG It indicates the DAS trigger while in DAS ENABLE mode.

SVE Lights up while the servo Amp is enabled.

SVALM Lights up when the servo Alarm is detected.

GLIMT Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Limit switch is actuated.(or) Cable check switch in the Gantry Take–up is actuated.

TBLSTOP Lights up when the TGP loses control of the cradle In/Out operation.

CCWR Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CCW rest position.

CWR Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CW rest position.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY1–2

REV 0

1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp.

The Gantry Servo Amp. contains a 7 segment LED which indicates Servo Amp. failure modes.

For Servo Amp. 2198990

SV–OFF Indicates that Servomechanism is OFF.

SV–ON Indicates normal control with Servomechanism ON.

CUR Indicates over–current of output circuit.

LOAD Indicates motor overload.

SPEED Indicates motor over–speed.

TEMP Indicates abnormal driver temperature.

ECD Indicates open circuit for Encoder signal.

PS Indicates abnormal power supply board.

PWR Indicates that power for motor drive is OFF.

CPU Indicates uncontrollable CPU


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY1–3

REV 0

1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp. (continued)

For Servo Amp. P9153SF

O.C OVER CURRENT:Indicates over current in output circuit

O.L OVER LOAD:Indicates motor over load

O.H OVER HEAT:Indicates overheating of the Power Transistor

F.E CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF:Indicates that the input circuit breaker has been tripped

P.E DYNAMIC BREAKER FUNCTION FAIL:Indicates dynamic break function failure.

S.E SPEED ERROR:Indicates excessive motor speed (120% of maximum speed)

V.E VOLTAGE ERROR (POWER FAIL):Indicates input voltage failure (85% or less than normal operational voltage)

C.E COMMUTATION ERROR:Indicates commutation signal failure

(No Display) Power is not applied or Normal operating status

The Servo Amp. also contains 5 LEDs which indicate the following conditions as shown in Table 1–1.

Table 1–1 Servo Amp. LED

LED Color Description

RGSO Green Indicates that Servo Amp. is ready to operate when lit.

R.S Green Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.Indicates external reset of Servo Amp.

+15 Green Indicates that +15V power is OK when lit.

–15 Green Indicates that –15V power is OK when lit.

C.L (T.H) Green Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.Indicates that external current limit or torque hold operation is working.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY1–4

REV 0

1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH

Tables 1–2 and 1–3 show the functions of the TGP DIAG. Dip switches.

Table 1–2 Diag. Dip Switch (Gantry Processor)

Switch No. Description

S1 ON : Disables Aperture Check.

S2 ON : Disables Gantry Rotation Initialize.

S3 ON : Measure the Gantry rotation Time in OFF LINE TEST #401.

S4 Gantry MID speed selectOFF : MID = 2.7 sec/revON : MID = 3.6 sec/rev

S5 ON : Positioning Light 0/270 degree mode

Gantry Light Switch is Pressed Once Light Switch is Pressed TwicePosition

0° Light ON or OFF (toggle) Gantry rotates to 270° position,then Light is lit ON.

270° Light ON or OFF (toggle) Gantry returns to 0° position,then Light is lit ON

Other than Gantry returns to 0° position, Gantry rotates to 270° position,0° and 270° then Light is lit ON. then Light is lit ON.

S6 Gantry Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.

S7

S8 Disables Gantry Processor ROM Check.Disables Gantry Processor Watchdog Timer function.

Table 1–3 Diag. Dip Switch (T able Processor)

Switch No. Description

S9 Disables Scan Status Check.Disables Automatic –150mm Table height stop.Disables Automatic zero degree tilt stop.

S10 Not Used.

S11 Disables the interlock function for Table up/down and Gantry Tilt.

S12 ON : Cradle IN limit short mode.

S13 OFF : CT Sytec mode.

S14 Table Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.

S15

S16 Disables Table Processor ROM check.Disables Table Processor watchdog timer function.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–1

REV 0

SECTION 2 – TGP POWER–ON TEST

The TGP contains two Micro Processors. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)

Theses processors execute the following programs independently power is applied or reset occurs.

� Gantry Processor – RAM Check– ROM Check– Gantry Azimuth Rotation Check and Gantry Azimuth Initialize.

� Table Processor – RAM Check– ROM Check– Display Check

2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR

RAM Check

The Gantry Processor performs memory READ/WRITE response checks for the micro processor internal RAM andexternal RAM.

� PD78310 internal RAMADDRESS FE00 ∼ FEEF

� RAM (16S45)ADDRESS C000 ∼ C7FF

This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.

If the Gantry Processor detects and error, ii displays the error via the LEDs as follows:

ERRA, LOOPA, REQA and MNLA LESs ON.

If the test passes, LOOPA LED blinks.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–2

REV 0

2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR (continued)

ROM Check

The Gantry Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.

� Sum Check AddressADDRESS 0 ∼ BFFF (ROM Sum data is in address 00FF.)

If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it indicates the error on the LEDs as follows:

ERRA, REQA and MNLA LEDs ON.

If successful, LOOPA LED blinks.

Gantry Rotation Check and Initialize

The Gantry Processor performs the Gantry Rotation Check and azimuth position initialization after completion of theROM Check. The following chart shows initializing operations:

Illustration 2–1 CCW Rest Area

CCW Rest Area

End of CCW Rest Area10° + 5°

Home0°

33°

1

23

4


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–3

REV 0


Illustration 2–2 Gantry Initialize Operation

START

SYS tor MNLPosition ?

CCW RestArea ?

Out of CCWRest Area ?

Check TGP ManualSwitch Status

Indicates Status on LEDsERRA and LOOPA Alternate

‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.

Check Azimuth Position

Rotate Gantry toCW Direction

Stop Gantry Rota-tion at 10°

Rotate Gantry toCCW Direction

Initialize AzimuthPosition Counter by

G.Pulse.

Stop Gantry at –33°Position

Rotate Gantry toCW Direction

Stop Gantry atHOME (0°)

MNL

SYS

NO

YES

NO

YES

4

3

2

1


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–4

REV 0


If the Gantry Processor detects an error during the Rotation check and Initialization, the Gantry Processor StopsGantry rotation and displays an error via the LEDs and the Gantry processor hangs up (stops operations).

Table 2–1 Error Lists and LED Status

Error ListLED Status

Error ListERRA SVALM GLIMT

Servo Alarm ON ON –

Gantry Limit Position Error (or) Cable Check switch Error ON – ON

Gantry Not Rotating ON – –

Gantry Over Speed ON – –

–33 degree Position Check Error ON – –

G.Pulse Not Detected during Rotation to –33 degree Position ON – –

Gantry did not Reach Home within 10sec of CW Rotation Towardthe Home Position

ON – –


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–5

REV 0

2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR

RAM Check

The Table Micro Processor performs a memory READ/WRITE response check on the micro processor internal RAMand external RAM.

� PD78310 internal RAMADDRESS FE00 ∼ FEEF

� RAM (16S45)ADDRESS C000 ∼ C7FF

This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.

If the Table Processor detects an error, if displays the error via the LEDs as follows:

ERRB, LOOPB REQB and MNLB LEDs ON

If successful, LOOPB LED blinks.

ROM Check

The Table Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.

� Sum Check Address 0 ∼ 3FFF (ROM Sum data is in 00FF)

If the Table Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:

ERRB, REQB and MNLB LEDs ON

If successful, LOOPB LED blinds.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY2–6

REV 0

2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR (continued)

Display Check

The Table Processor performs the display check program after the ROM Check.

Table 2–2 lists the Gantry Panel Switch and Gantry display LED display check patterns.

Table 2–2 Gantry Display Check Pattern

Gantry Display Gantry Switch

Ptn FWD BWD D8 D7 D6 Posn Hgh – D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Up Down In

0 � �

1 � �

2 � �

3 �

4 � �

5 � �

6 � �

7 �

8 � �

9 � �

10 – – – – – – – – �

11


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–1

REV 0

SECTION 3 – TGP OFF–LINE TEST

3-1 TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST

The TGP Assembly contains two micro processor system. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)

Theses Processor systems can execute the OFF–LINE programs used for subsystem Adjustment, Functional Checkand Diagnostics.

Each Processor holds test programs in its own PROM. Execute each Processor’s OFF–LINE TEST program inde-pendently with the DIAG switches and test switches.

The Micro Processor displays the test results and/or error on the Gantry Display Panel, so it requires a normally oper-ating TABLE Processor display function. Execute the OFF–LINE TEST program after successful completion of theTABLE PROCESSOR DISPLAY TEST.

The OFF–LINE TEST program performs three operations:

� Real Time Monitor Mode (I/O Status Check)Use this mode to monitor Table /Gantry subsystem position information.[Cradle Position, Table height, Tilt Angle (Table Processor) and Azimuth Position (Gantry Processor)] andStatus of Micro Processor’s I/O ports.

� Response Test Mode (Sequential function Test)Micro Processor performs I/O port response check, internal timer function check, internal pulse generatorfunction check, cradle drive operation check (Table Processor) and Collimator drive operation check(Gantry Processor).

� Simulate Test Mode (I/O Port Bit Check Tool)Use this test mode to manipulate output port bits selected by test switches.Use the Gantry Panel Switches to set bit data for the Table Processor test. Use the TGP manual switchesto set bit data for Gantry Processor Test.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–2

REV 0

3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check

1. Set S14 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.

Press the ‘Reset’ wwitch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display shows the Test Number (000) and cradle positionvalue in decimal form.

Example Value

2. To select the test program, press the TEST switch on TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time you

press the test switch until it reaches

The Test Number loops back to after . (i.e., Loop 000 ∼ 013)

Use Test Number 000 ∼ 002 to monitor the CRADLE POSITION, TABLE HEIGHT and TILT ANGLE.(i.e., AD CONVERTER VALUE)

Use Test Number 003 ∼ 011 to monitor I/O PORT STATUS.

Use Test Number 012 and 013 to monitor ERROR CODE and ROM SUM DATA of ROM Check.

Table 3–1 ∼ 3–3 shows the bit assignment of the I/O port.

3. To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.

Illustration 3–1 Diag. Swishes

Reset

Test A

Test B

H0HGP0PGT0TG

CPU CPU

S1

S8

S9

S16

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Gantry ProcessorDiag. Switch

Table ProcessorDiag. Switch


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–3

REV 0

3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check (continued)

Table 3–1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check

Test Number Test Display

000 CRADLE POSITION

Display Cradle AbsolutePosition in decimal form.

� Zero Position; Cradle Mechanical Out limit.

� 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0100 → 50mm away from Zero Position

In Limit Out Limit

3050(1525mm)

10(5mm)

3050(1525mm)

10(5mm)

SCANNABLE RANGE

CRADLE LIMIT POSITION

� If the cradle is within the range of 0 ∼ 30 (0mm ∼ 15mm), the Table can be lowered to –600mm.

001 TABLE HEIGHT

Display Table Height indecimal form.

� Zero Position ; Table height –605mm form ISO center.(Mechanical lowest position from ISO center is –610mm)

� 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0010 → Table height –600mmDisplay 1210 → Table Height 0mm

� Up direction (+)

002 TILT ANGLE

Display Tilt Angle in deci-mal.

� Zero Position ; Tilt FWD 25.5°.� 0.1°/digit. (e.g.) Display 0005 → FWD25°

Display 0255 → 0°Display 0505 → BWD 25°

� BWD direction (+)


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–4

REV 0


Table 3–1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check (continued)

Test Number Description

003 Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and foot Switch Status.

Address FFB4

004 Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and OC Panel Switch Status.

Address FFB5

005 Display Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT0.

006 Display Input Port Status of Table Processor PORT1 in complement number.

007 Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT2.

008 Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT3.

009 Display Scan Control Port Status.Address FFB0

010 Display status of Table Processor Status LED Control Port.

Address FFB1

011 Display Status of ADC Control and Gantry Panel LED Control Port.

Address FFB2

012 Display Error Code while ERRB LED ON.

on condition that TABLE PROCESSOR works properly (i.e.) LOOPG LED ALTERNATES ON, OFF

Bit Assignments is :Bit 7 : Micro Processor hung–up

Bit 6 : Not Used

Bit 5 : Not Used

Bit 4 : Not Used

Bit 3 : Communication Error TG ⇐ OC (No ACK/NAC Response from OC.)

Bit 2 : Communication Error TG ⇒ OC (Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)

Bit 1 : Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)

Bit 0 : Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready when ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)

013 Display ROM SUM Check Data

is displayed when ROM SUM Check is completed successfully.

Note: ACK : AcknowledgeNAC : Non–AcknowledgeXMT : Transmission


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–5

REV 0


Table 3–2 Bit Assignment of I/O Port

Index Device Data Bit Description

RD5B

Gantry Panel Switch Statusand OC Panel Switch Status

(FFB4)

U3FD7 : FASTD6 : ZEROD5 : MTSD4 : POSID3 : HEIGHTD2 : RANGED1 : SCAND0 :

D7=1 ; FAST switch is depressedD6=1 ; ZERO switch is depressedD5=1 ; Move to Scan switch is depressedD4=1 ; Positioning Light ON switch is depressedD3=1 ; Height switch is depressedD2=1 ; Range switch is depressedD1=1 ; Scan set switch on OC Panel is depressedNot Used

RD4B

Gantry Panel Switch Statusand Foot Switch Status

(FFB3)

U3ED7 : IND6 : OUTD5 : UPRD4 : DNRD3 : FWDRD2 : BWDRD1 : FUPRD0 : FDNR

D7=1 ; IN switch is depressedD6=1 ; OUT switch is depressedD5=1 ; UP switch is depressedD4=1 ; DOWN switch is depressedD3=1 ; FORWARD switch is depressedD2=1 ; BACKWARD switch is depressedD1=1 ; Foot switch; UP is depressedD0=1 ; Foot switch; DOWN is depressed

WR2B

ADC Control and Gantry PanelSwitch LED Control

(FFB2)

U3JD7 : –D6 : –D5 : ADSEL 1D4 : ADSEL 0

D3 : –D2 : DNLEDD1 : UPLEDD0 : INLED

Not UsedNot UsedADC Input Selection D5 0 0 1

D4 0 1 1↓ ↓ ↓

Height Position TiltNot UsedGantry Panel SW D2=1 ; DOWN LED ONGantry Panel SW D1=1 ; UP LED ONGantry Panel SW D0=1 ; IN LED ON

WR1B

µProcessor (B) Status LEDControl

(FFB1)

U5QD7 : ERR.BD6 : LOOP.BD5 : OCREQ.BD4 : MNL.BD3 : D2 : D1 : D0 :

Control LED ON/OFF Not Used

WR0B

Scan Control (by Table Proces-sor)

(FFB0)

U7ED7 : –D6 : T.SCAND5 : T.DENAD4 : THVOND3 : D2 : D1 : D0 : T.OFFSET

Not UsedScan Mode Control D6=1 ; Table scanDAS Control D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS EnableHV ON Control D4=1 ; HV ON by Table ProcessorNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedDAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode

D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Table Processor


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–6

REV 0


Table 3–3 Bit assignment of Processor Port

Port Bit Description

P0 (OUT)

Port 0

Bit 7 : INTREQ ABit 6 : Bit 5 : BWDEBit 4 : FWDEBit 3 : DNEBit 2 : UPEBit 1 : TBLDRVBit 0 : IN

Interrupt Request to Gantry ProcessorNot UsedBit 5 = 1 ; Tilt Backward EnableBit 4 = 1 ; Tilt Forward EnableBit 3 = 1 ; Table Down EnableBit 2 = 1 ; Table Up EnableBit 1 = 1 ; Cradle DriveBit 0 = 1 ; Cradle IN, Bit 0 = 0 ; Cradle OUT

P1 (IN)

Port 1

Bit 7 : Test: Switch

Bit 0 : Data

Test Switch S9 ∼ S16 Status

Bit 0 ∼ 7 ; 0 = Switch ON

P2

Port 2

Bit 7 : –Bit 6 : GSCANBit 5 : OTCOMBit 4 : TOCOMBit 3 : SCANRSTBit 2 : COMINTBit 1 : ADINTBit 0 : TESTB

Not Used(IN) Bit 6 = 1 ; Gantry Scan Mode(SIO) Serial Communication OC → Table Processor(SIO) Serial Communication Table Processor → OC(INTR IN) Bit 3 = 1 ; Scan End: Interrupt from 8253 (View Control Counter)(INTR IN) Bit 2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Gantry µP(INTR IN) Bit 1 = 1 ; Interrupt from ADC(INTR IN) Bit 0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt

P3

Port 3

Bit 7 : TTRGBit 6 : TBLPLSBit 5 : TBLERRBit 4 : UNLATCHBit 3 : OUTDRVBit 2 : INDRVBit 1 : OUTPLSBit 0 : INPLS

(PLS OUT) Table Processor DAS Trigger(PLS OUT) Cradle drive Pulse(IN) Table Error Bit5 = 1 ; Cradle Error(IN) Cradle Unlatch Bit4 = 1 ; Cradle Unlatch(COUNTER) Cradle Out(COUNTER) Cradle In(COUNTER) Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle Out(COUNTER) Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle In

NoteINTR : InterruptSIO : Serial Input–OutputPLS : PulseCOUNTER : Input to Counter


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–7

REV 0

3-1-2 Sequential Function Test

In this test, Table Processor sequences through the following tests:

� Table Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test

� Table Processor Internal Counter Function Test

� Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test

� Cradle In/Out drive Operation Test

When the Table Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry Display.

1. Move the cradle approximately 500mm from the out limit position.

2. Set S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.

3. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board,

The Gantry Display shows the Test Number (100) and cradle position value in decimal form.

4. Press ‘TEST B’ switch on the TGP board to start test.

The Gantry Display shows the following when all tests complete successfully.

Table 3–4 shows the error code for each test.



2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–8

REV 0

3-1-2 Sequential Function Test (continued)

Table 3–4 Table Processor Sequential Function T est

TestNumber

Test Description

100|

147

I/O PortResponse Check

� Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of the Table Processor.� Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on the Gantry Display if error

detected.(i.e.)

� Test Number

� Show Bit4

Read Data of Processor indecimal number

100|

107

WR0B


Address FFB0 : Scan Control Port

Read/Write Response Check, U4Q and U4R on the TGP board.Refer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.

110|

117

WR1B


Address FFB1 : Status LED Control Port

Read/Write Response Check, U5Q and U5R on the TGP board.Refer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.

120|

127

WR2B


Address FFB2 : ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control Port

Read/Write Response Check, U3H and U5J on the TGP board.Refer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.

140|

147

P0

I/O Portresponse Check

Table Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.

Refer to Table 3–3 of this section for Bit Assignment.

160 Time BaseCounter Check

� Check the Table Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function� Interval Timer repeat period 10.9msec.� Error Indication

161 DAS TriggerPulse Generator

&DAS Trigger

Counter FunctionCheck

� Check Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.� Check 8253 Timer Function� Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger and outputs to Timer 8253 from pin 42.� Timer 8253 generates interrupt (INTE 2) after it counts 64 DAS trigger pulse.� If Timer 8253 does not generate INTE 2 interrupt, Table Processor indicates error.� Error Indication


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–9

REV 0


Table 3–4 Table Processor Sequential Function T est (continued)

TestNumber

Test Description Error

170 Cradle DrivePulse Generatorand Cradle EncoderCheck

� Test 170 ∼ 171 are done through the following Cradle OperationCheck.

(1) Set 3 seconds on to Watch dog Timer.

(2) Move Cradle 20mm IN.

(3) Check Cradle position.

If cradle does not reach to 20mm position within 3 second,Table processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.

170&

171

Cradle PositionEncoder PulseCounter FunctionalCheck

(4) Check interrupt from Cradle Position Encoder Pulse Counter.

If interrupt is not generated before completion of 20mm cradletravel. Table Processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.

(5) Move Cradle 20mm OUT.

(6) Check Cradle Position [Same as step (3)] If error →(7) Check Interrupt. [Same as step (4)] if error →

172 Cradle DriveUn–controlledFail DetectionCircuit Check

(8) Move Cradle 20mm IN.

(9) Cradle will be stopped by Un–controlled Fail Detection CircuitTBLSTP LED lights ON.

If Un–controlled Fail Detection Circuit does not work,Table Processor indicates error.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–10

REV 0

3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check

CAUTION

Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.

� Switch OFF the ‘TBL/T ilt’ and ‘Scan’ switches at the Gantry rear base.� Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.� Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker .� Insert the azimuth lock pin.

1. Set S14 and S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’position.

2. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display showsthe Test Number (200) and cradle position value in decimal form.

3. Press ‘TEST B’ switch once on the TGP board.The Gantry Display shows the following:

4. Set I/O Port Bit.Example: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit3 to ‘High’ (i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Height] switches)The Gantry Display shows :

LightRange

Zero

Move toScanFWD

DownOut

HeightFast

In Up

BWD

(Bit 0)

(Bit 1)

(Bit 2)

(Bit 3)

(Bit 4)

(Bit 5)

(Bit 6) (Bit 7)

Test Number Bit Status of Port

Bit7:0Bit6:0

Bit5:0Bit4:0

Bit3:1Bit2:0

Bit1:1Bit0:1

0 0 2 3


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–11

REV 0

3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check (continued)

5. To select the next test, press the ‘TEST B’ switch. The Gantry Display shows:

6. To select test (210), press the ‘TEST B’ switch once again. The Gantry Display shows:

7. Set I/O Port BitExample: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit5 to ‘High’ (i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Zero] switches).The Gantry Display shows:

8. The Test number increase each time you press the ‘TEST B’ switch until it reaches 240.The Test number loops pack to 200 after 240.

If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:

9. To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 and S15 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.

Bit7:0Bit6:0

Bit5:1Bit4:0

Bit3:0Bit2:0

Bit1:1Bit0:1

0 2 0 3

Table 3–5 I/O Port Bit Check Program (T able Processor)

TestNumber

Test Description

200 WR0B

I/O Port Bit Set/Clear Test

Address FFB0 : Scan Control

Bit Set/Clear TestRefer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.

210 WR1B


Address FFB1 : Status LED Control


220 WR2B


Address FFB2 : ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control


240 Table Processor P0 Port BitSet/Clear Test

Table Processor Output Port Bit Set/Clear Test


If Set data and Read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–12

REV 0

3-1-4 Table Processor Bit T able

Table 3–6 Table Processor Bit T able

Port Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P0(OUT)

INTERCA BWDE FWDE DNE UPE TBLDRV IN

P1(IN)

S16

S15

S14

S13

S12

S11

S10

S9

P2 GSCAN(IN)

OGCOM(SIO)

TOCOM(SIO)

SCANRST COMINT(INTR)

ADINTR(INTR)

TESTB(INTR)

P3 TTRG(PLS)

TBLPLS(PLS)

TBLERR(IN)

UNLATCH OUTDRV(counter)

INDRV(counter)

OUTPLS(counter)

INPLS(counter)


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–13

REV 0

3-2 GANTRY PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST

3-2-1 I/O Port Status Check

1. Set S6 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.

2. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board.


Example Value

3. To select the Test program, press the ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board. The Test Number increases each timeyou press the test switch until it reaches 414.

The Test Number Loops back to 400 after 414.



2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–14

REV 0


Table 3–7 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

TestNumber

Test Description

400 Azimuth Position � Zero Position; –180° Position

� 1°/digit(e.g.) CCW 3sec Rest Position = –71° Display = 109

HOME = 0° Display = 180CW 2sec Rest Position = 431° Display = 611

401 Gantry Rotation Time � Display the time from HOME position to HOME position.

� 10msec/digit(e.g.) Time = 1.825sec Display = 0183

Time = 20737sec Display = 0274

402 Gantry Driving Time � Display the time from Rest position to Rest position.

� 10msec/digit(e.g.) Time = 1.825 Display = 0320

Time = 2.737 Display = 0440

The procedure of TEST401 and 402 as follows:a. Set display mode to TEST No. 401 or 402.b. Flip on S3 of the Dip SW.c. Rotate the Gantry from CW(CCW) REST position to CCW(CW)

REST position by MNL and FIX SW on the TGP board.

d. TGP measures and displays the time.(Display indicates 0000 during measuring the time.)

e. Flip off S3 of Dip SW after the TEST.

403 RD4A I/O Port Display TGP Manual Switch Status.

Address FFB4

Refer to Table bor Bit Assignment.

404 RD5A I/O Port Display Aperture Status and Gantry Rest Position Status in ComplementNumber

Address FFB5

Refer to Table for Bit Assignment.

405 Processor Port 0 Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 0.

Refer to Table 3–9 for Bit Assignment.

406 Processor Port 1 Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 1 in ComplementNumber


407 Processor Port 2 Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 2.


408 Processor Port 3 Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 3.



2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–15

REV 0


Table 3–7 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

TestNumber

Test Description

409 WR0A I/O Port Display Positioning Light and Scan Control Port Status.

Address FFB0


410 WR1A I/O Port Display Status of Gantry Processor Status lED Control Port.

Address FFB1


411 D/A Converter Status Display Input Data to D/A Converter in decimal (0 ∼ 4095).

MSB = Bit 7 of AddressLSB = Bit 4 of Address


412 – Display Error Code while ERRA LED ON. ON condition that Gantry Processor works properly (i.e.) LOOPA LED alternates ON, OFF

Bit Assignment is:Bit 7 : Micro Processor hung–upBit 6 : Gantry rotation Initializing errorBit 5 : Gantry Rotation Over SpeedBit 4 : Gantry not rotateBit 3 : Communication error TG ⇒ OC

(No ACK/NAC Response from OC)Bit 2 : Communication Error TG ⇐ OC

(Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)Bit 1 : Communication Error

(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)Bit 0 : Communication Error

(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready when ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)

413 – Display ROM SUM check DataDisplayed when ROM SUM Check is completes successfully.

414 Rotate Peek Speed Counts the encoder pulses every 10.9msec during scan and displays theirmaximum value.

Example: When the Gantry rotates at the speed of 3.079sec/Rotation,the Gantry Display shows the following value ideally.

Practically, about 4 counts greater than this value will be displayed due tothe overshoot of rotation.

14,256(pulse/rot) ×3.097 × 1,000(msec/rot)

10.9(msec)

Note ACK : AcknowledgeNAC : Non–acknowledgeXMT : Transmission


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–16

REV 0


Table 3–8 Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor)


RD5A

ApertureStatus andGantry Azimuth Status

(FFB5)

U6E D7 : APT10D6 : APT5D5 : APT2D4 : APT1D3 : CWR D2 : CCWR D1 : SVALMD0 : GLIMT

(D7 = 0) Aperture is set 10mm position.(D6 = 0) Aperture is set 5mm position.(D5 = 0) Aperture is set 2mm position.(D4 = 0) Aperture is set 1mm position.(D3 = 0) Gantry at CW Rest position.(D2 = 0) Gantry at CCW Rest position.

Servo Alarm is detected.(D0 = 1) Gantry reached to CW or CCW Limit

(or) Cable Check Switch is actuated.

RD4A

TGP ManualSwitch Status

(FFB4)

U7CD7 : SYSD6 : MNLD5 : CWD4 : CCWD3 : ARGD2 : FIX D1 : FASTD0 : SLOW

D7 = 1 ; SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to SYS positionD6 = 1 ; SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to MNL positionD5 = 1 ; CW/HOME/CCW switch is placed to CW positionD4 = 1 ; CW;home/CCW switch is placed to CCW positionD3 = 1 ; ARB/SVE/FIX switch is placed to ARB positionD2 = 1 ; ARB/SVE FIX switch is placed to FIX positionD1 = 1 ; FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to FAST positionD0 = 1 ; FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to SLOW position

WR3A

DAC Data(Lower Bit)

(FFB3)

U8RD7 : Bit 9D6 : Bit 10D5 : Bit 11D4 : Bit 12D3 : D2 : D1 : D0 :

Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6) Not Used

WR2A

DAC Data(Higher Bit)

(FFB2)

U8TD7 : Bit 1D6 : Bit 2D5 : Bit 3D4 : Bit 4D3 : Bit 5D2 : Bit 6D1 : Bit 7D0 : Bit 8

Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6)


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–17

REV 0


Table 3–8 Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor) (continued)


WR1A

µProcessor(A) StatusLED Control

(FFB1)

U6CD7 : ERR.AD6 : LOOP.AD5 : OCREQ.AD4 : MNL.AD3 : D2 : D1 : D0 :

Control LED ON/OFF Not Used

WR0A

PositioningLight andScan Control(by GantryProcessor)

(FFB0)

U7ED7 : P–Light OnD6 : GSCAND5 : T.DENAD4 : GPHVOND3 : SVON D2 : HOMERSTD1 : –D0 : G.OFFSET

Positioning Light Control ; D7=1 ; Positioning Light ONScan Mode Control ; D6=1 ; Gantry ScanDAS Control ; D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS ENABLEHV ON Control ; D4=1 ; HV ON by Gantry PulseAxial drive Control ; Servo ON D3=1 ; Release Hold BrakeAxial drive Control ; Azimuth Position Rest D2=1 ; Move Gantry to HomeNot UsedDAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode

D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Gantry Processor


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–18

REV 0


Table 3–9 Bit Assignment of Processor Port (Gantry Processor)

Port Bit Description

P0 (OUT)

Port 0

Bit 7 : INTREQ BBit 6 : APTPLSBit 5 : APRSTBit 4 : BRKBit 3 : SVE Bit 2 : CW/CCW

Bit 1 : SPD2Bit 0 : SPD1

Interrupt Request to Table Processor(PLS OUT) aperture Pulse ; Pulse for Aperture DriveAperture Reset ; Bit5 = 0 Aperture ResetBrake ; Bit4 = 0 Dynamic Brake ModeServo Enable ; Bit3 = 0 Servo EnableCW SCAN / CCW SCAN ; DAS Control ; Bit2 = 1 CW Scan

; Bit1 = 0 CCW ScanScan Speed Code ; DAS Control ; Indicate Scan Speed to DAS

P1 (IN)

Port 1

Bit7 : Test SW Data

Bit0 :

Test Switch S1 ∼ S8 Status

Bit0 ∼ Bit 7 ; 0 = Switch ON

P2

Port 2

Bit 7 : –Bit 6 : TSCANBit 5 : OGCOMBit 4 : GOCOMBit 3 : –Bit 2 : COMINTBit 1 : HOME

Bit 0 : TESTA

Not Used(IN) Bit6 = 1 ; Table Scan Mode(SIO) Serial Communication OC → Gantry Processor(SIO) Serial Communication Gantry Processor → OCNot Used(INTR IN) Bit2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Table Processor(INTR IN) Bit1 = 1 ; Interrupt from Gantry Pulse Photo Switch

Gantry at Home position(INTR IN) Bit0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt

P3

Port 3

Bit 7 : GTRGBit 6 : –Bit 5 : –Bit 4 : POSLBit 3 : –Bit 2 : DTRGBit 1 : CCWPLSBit 0 : CWPLS

(PLS OUT) Gantry Processor DAS TriggerNot UsedNot Used(IN) Bit4 = 1 ;Positioning Light ONNot Used(COUNTER) DAS Trigger Pulse(COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CCW Rotation)(COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CW Rotation)

Note INTR : InterruptSIO : Serial Input–OutputPLS : PulseCOUNTER : Input to Counter


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–19

REV 0

3-2-2 Sequential Function Test

In this test, processor sequences through the following tests:

� Gantry Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test

� Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function Test

� Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test

� Collimater Drive Operation Test

When the Gantry Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry display and stop the test program.

1. Set S7 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.



3. Press ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board to start test.


Table shows the error code for each test.



2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–20

REV 0


Table 3–10 Gantry Processor Sequential Function T est

TestNumber

Test Description

500|

547

I/O Port Response Check

� Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of Gantry Processor (U7L)

� Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on Gantry display if error detected.

(i.e.)

� Test Number

� Show Bit 4

Read Data of Processor indecimal Number

500|

507

WR0A

I/O Port Response Check

Address FFB0 : Positioning Light and Scan Control PortRead/Write Response Check, U7E and U7D on the TGP board.


510

517

WR1A


Address FFB1 : Status LED Control PortRead/Write Response Check, U6C and U6D on the TGP board.


520|

527

WR2A


Address FFB2 : DAC Input Data portRead/Write Response Check, U8T and U8S on the TGP board.


530|

537

WR3A


Address FFB3 : DAC Input Data PortRead/Write Response Check, U8R and U8Q on the TGP board.


540|

547

P0I/O PortResponse Check

Gantry Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.


560 Time BaseCounter Check

� Checks Gantry Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function.

� Interval Timer repeat period 10.9 msec.

� Error Indication:

561 DAS TriggerPulse GeneratorandDAS TriggerCounter FunctionCheck

� Checks Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.

� Checks Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function.

� Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger pulse.Internal Counter counts DAS trigger.

� If Counter does not count up 64 pulses within 1sec, Gantry Processor indicatesError.

� Time Base Counter is used as a WATCHDOG TIMER.

� Error Indication:


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–21

REV 0


Table 3–10 Gantry Processor Sequential Function T est (continued)

TestNumber

Test Description

570|

589

CollimatorResponse Check

� Check Collimator Drive Function and Position Sending.

� Move Aperture as the following sequence and check response.If aperture does not respond to command properly,Gantry Processor indicates Error and Stop Test.

Aperture Movement Sequence

10 mm5 mm3 mm1 mm1 2 3

6 5

7

9

8

10

11

12

13

4

Test No.570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589

Test→ 1mm

1mm → 3mm3mm → 5mm5mm → 10mm10mm→ 5mm5mm → 3mm3mm → 1mm1mm → 5mm5mm → 1mm1mm → 10mm10mm→ 1mm1mm → 10mm10mm→ 3mm3mm → 10mm10mm→ 2mm2mm → 1mm1mm → 2mm2mm → 5mm5mm → 2mm2mm → 10mm

14

15

16 17

18

19

10 mm5 mm3 mm1 mm

1 : Test No.571 6 : Test No.576 11 : Test No.581 16 : Test No.5862 : Test No.572 7 : Test No.577 12 : Test No.582 17 : Test No.5873 : Test No.573 8 : Test No.578 13 : Test No.583 18 : Test No.5884 : Test No.574 9 : Test No.579 14 : Test No.584 19 : Test No.5895 : Test No.575 10 : Test No.580 15 : Test No.585

(Example of Error)

Example of Movement5mm → 10mm


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–22

REV 0

3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check

CAUTION

Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.

� Switch OFF the ‘TBL/T ilt’ and ‘Scan’ switches at the Gantry rear base.� Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.� Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker .� Insert the azimuth lock pin.

1. Set S6 and S7 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.



means the output port bits are all OFF.

3. Press ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board to start test.


Test Number Bit Status of Port

4. Set the I/O Port:Example : Set Bit0 and Bit3 to High.

(i.e., Set CCW/HOME/CW switch to CW position, Set FAST/MID/SLOW switch to FAST position)The Gantry Display shows:

Bit7:0Bit6:0

Bit5:0Bit4:0

Bit3:1Bit2:0

Bit1:0Bit0:1

0 0 2 1

SYS

MNL

ABT

FIX

FAST

SLOW

CCW

CW

Bit7 Bit5 Bit3 Bit1

Bit6 Bit4 Bit2 Bit0


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–23

REV 0

3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check (continued)

5. To select the next test, press the TEST A switch.The Gantry Display shows:

6. To select test 610, press the TEST A switch once again.The Gantry Display shows:

7. The test number increases each time you press the TEST B switch until it reaches 650.The test number loops back to 600 after 650.

If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:

8. To exit this Test Mode: Move S6 and S7 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.

Table 3–11 I/O Port Bit Check Program (Gantry Processor)

TestNumber

Test Description

600 WR0A


Address FFB0 : Positioning Light and Scan Control PortBit Set/Clear Test


610 WR1A


Address FFB1 : Status LED Control PortBit Set/Clear Test


620 WR2A


Address FFB2 :DAC Input Data portBit Set/Clear Test


630 WR3A


Address FFB3 : DAC Input Data PortBit Set/Clear Test


640 Gantry Processor P0 PortBit Set/Clear Test

Gantry Processor Output Port P0, Bit Set/Clear Test


650 Collimator Set Test Set Aperture Response Error (Example)Bit0 select → 1mm setBit1 select → 2mm setBit2 select → 3mm setBit3 select → 5mm setBit4 select → 10mm set(Bit5 ∼ Bit7 → Not used)

Shows that the position sensorof 1mm and 3mm are ON.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY3–24

REV 0

3-2-4 Gantry Processor Bit T able

Table 3–12 Gantry Processor Bit T able

Port Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P0(out) INTERC B APTPLS

APTRST

BRK SVE

CW/CCW SPD2 SPD1

P1(in)

S8

S7

S6

S5

S4

S3

S2

S1

P2 TSCAN(IN)

OGCOM(SIO)

OGCOM(SIO)

COMINT(INTR)

HOME(INTR)

TEST A(INTR)

P3 GTRG(PLS)

POSL(IN)

DTRIG(counter)

CCWPLS(counter)

CWPLS(counter)


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–1

REV 0

SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR

4-1 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4-1-1 Flow Chart

Illustration 4–1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. 2108990)

Motor won’t Rotate

Any Alarm on LED ofServo Amp.

Check Signal Cable from TGPto Servo Amp.

Is Voltage Command atVout–AGND of TGP

SVE Signal OK ?(i.e., +24V–U8Y5pin of TGP)

Replace Servo Amp.

Refer to Servo Alarm of thissection.

Check TGP Board.

Check TGP Board.

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–2

REV 0

4-1-1 Flow Chart (continued)

Illustration 4–2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. P9153SF)

� Check TGP Board.

� Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.

Motor won’t Rotate

Any Alarm on LED ofServo Amp.

Refer to Servo Alarm of thissection.

Yes

No

Is Voltage Commandat CN1 3–4 ?

Yes

No

� Check TGP Board.

� Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.RSGO Signal OK ?

(i.e., CN1 21–25 Closed)

Yes

No

Replace Fuse(s).Check Fuses OK ?

Yes

No

Replace Servo Amp.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–3

REV 0

4-1-2 Servo Alarm

The following descriptions comprise the troubleshooting guide for the Servo Alarm indicated on the Servo Alarm LEDof Servo Amp.

For Servo Amp. 2108990

LED Case Cause Action

OFF AC Power is not supplied to the driver. Check if wire harnesses are open.

– SV–ON signal is not supplied. Check if wire harnesses are open.

0 F–LMT and R–LMT signals are not ON

Turn ON then or remove the JSW2–1jumper.

1 At power–ON Faulty driver control circuit Replace Servo Amp.

At SV–ON Short circuit between motor wire har-nesses

Replace Motor.

Faulty driver power amp. Replace Servo Amp.

When the motor starts to rotate or de-celerate

Driver mis–adjustment

2 At SV–ON (Motor shaft is vibrated) Servo Amp. mis–adjustment Replace Servo Amp.

When the motor starts to rotate or de-celerate

Overload for rotation section Check if a material is contacted withGantry rotating section.

Locked motor shaft Check motor (Is mechanical brakeapplied ?)

At SV–ON (Motor shaft is not vi-brated.)

Mis–connection of encoder signal cir-cuit

Replace Servo Amp.

3 When the motor starts to rotate or de-celerate

Overshot of step response Replace Servo Amp.

5 When power is applied Mis–connection inside the driver Replace Servo Amp.

After performing control operation Overheat inside the driver Check scan room temperature, thenreplace Servo Amp.

6 When power is applied Open circuit of encoder signal wire Check CN2 connector.

When Gantry rotates slightly afterpower ON and SV–ON

Mis–connection of CN2 and TB2(U,V,W)

Check CN2 connector and TB2(U,V,W) terminals.

Abnormal encoder signal Replace Motor.

7 After SV–ON signal is input Alarm signal of regenerative board is notconnected, or power is not applied to re-generative board.

After Scan and Table/Tilt switchesare turned On, Control switch is ON.Then check if wires (R,S,T) are con-nected properly to TB2.

Fuse(s) is burn. Replace fuse(s) of the Servo Amp.front panel, or replace Servo Amp.

When motor starts to decelerate Abnormal regenerative board Replace Servo Amp.

8 After SV–ON signal is input The fuse of the driver board is burn. Replace Servo Amp.

= Abnormal driver control circuit Replace Servo Amp.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–4

REV 0

4-1-2 Servo Alarm (continued)

For Servo Amp. P9153SF

1 O.C. (OVER CURRENT)

a. Motor winding short circuit ? → Replace Motor.

b. Motor lead wire grounded ? → Check power lead of motor.

c. Shorted output Transistor ? → Replace servo Amp.

d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

2 O.L. (OVER LOAD)

a. Gantry mechanical Failure ? → Check Gantry.

b. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

c. Communication Sensor of motor ? → Replace Motor.

3 O.H. (OVER HEAT)

a. Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

4 F.E. (CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF)

a. Motor winding short circuit ? → Replace Motor.

b. Motor lead wire grounded ? → Check power lead of motor.

c. Shorted output Transistor ? → Re;ace Servo Amp.

d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

5 P.E. (DYNAMIC BRAKE FUNCTION FAIL)

a. Dynamic Brake Resistors open ? → Check Dynamic Brake Resistors.

b. Input Voltage too high ? → Check Input Voltage.

6 S.E. (SPEED ERROR)

a. VR2 ADJUSTMENT ? → Check and Adjust VR2.

b. VOLTAGE COMMAND ? → Check Voltage Command from TGP.

c. TACO GEN Signal Connection ? → Check TACO GEN Signal Cable.

d. TACO GEN Fail ? → Replace Motor.

7 V.E. (VOLTAGE ERROR POWER FAIL)

a. Input Voltage drop (170 VAC)? → Check Input Voltage.

b. Bad Connection of Input Lead ? → Check Cable Connection.

c. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

8 C.E. (COMMUNICATION ERROR)

a. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.

b. Signal Connection between Servo Amp. and Motor ? → Check Cable Connection.

c. Communication Sensor of Motor ? → Replace Motor.


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–5

REV 0

4-1-3 Resetting the Servo Alarm

To reset the Servo Alarm displayed on the Servo Amp. LED, press the reset button as show in illustration below.

Illustration 4–3 Location of Reset Button

TGP Board

SUB Board

Servo Amp.

Reset Button(P9153SF Servo Amp. Only )

Reset Button(2108947 SUB Board Only )


2242063


TABLE/GANTRY4–6

REV 0

4-2 SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SER VO AMP. (P9153SF)

Table 4–2 Test Point of Servo Amp.

Test Point Function Description

15G Ground ± 15VDC Power Ground

+15 +15VDC Control Power +15V ± 0.3VDC

–15 –15VDC Control Power –15V ± 0.3VDC

+24 +24VDC Control Power +24V ± 20%

+12 +12VDC +12VDC : +12V ± 20%

12G Ground +12VDC Power Ground

TP8 Voltage Command Voltage Command Signal 6V/1,000rpm

VTG TACH. VOLTAGE Output of TACHO. GEN Feedback Loop Amp.

4.5V ± 0.5V / 1,000rpmGantry CCW Rotation : PositiveGantry CW Rotation : Negative

IA Current Monitor Output of Current Monitor Amp.

0.2V/A ± 5.0%

A Communication Sensor OutputSignal Monitor

Communication Sensor Output : Phase A

BSignal Monitor

Communication Sensor Output : Phase B

C Communication Sensor Output : Phase C

CK Clock Pulse Clock Pulse (Basic Clock)

0.9mHz ± 0.2mHz

TP1

TP2

Pulse Width Modulation Signal Pulse Width Modulation Signal for Inverter

1kHz ∼ 2kHz


2242063


DAS/DETECTORi

REV 0

DAS / DETECTOR

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – DETECTOR CHANNEL 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECT OR RELATED) 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 ARTIFACT PROBLEM 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


DAS/DETECTORii

blank


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–1

REV 0

SECTION 1 – DETECTOR CHANNEL

1-1 DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY

The active and reference channels are connected the DAS. The ground channels are both ground and connectedto the DAS. The 32 reference channels are divided into two groups of 6 channels each. The channels of each groupare connected in parallel, so they produce 2 reference signals, one from each group of 16 reference channels. Thereference signals are used to apply corrections to the acquired x–ray view data.

4 1 63516

GND

4161

Ref. Channels Active Channels Ref. Channels GND

123635

636(16ch. COMMON)

637(16ch. COMMON)


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–2

REV 0

1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART

Table shows the DAS Channel – Ring Diameter cross references. Refer to the description below.

CH# : Channel NumberCN# : Connector NumberAR# : Pin Array (A ∼ D)PN# : Pin Number from left side (1 ∼ 25)FR# : Flexible printed circuit NumberBR# : Branch Number of each FPCDA# : Amplifier Number of CAM and NCAM boards

#1 :Unit Number #1 of CAM Board #1#10 :Unit Number #2 of CAM Board #2

DIA (cm) Diameter of image ring artifact in cm

251

PN#

2 3 4 2423

ABCD

AR#


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–3

REV 0

1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART (continued)

Table 1–1 Ring Diameter Chart

CH# CN# AR# PN# FR# BR# DA# DIA (cm) CH# CN# AR# PN# FR# BR# DA# DIA (cm)

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

ADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADB

23333444455556666777788889999

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515151616

1111111111111111111111111111111111112222222222222222222

777788889999

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515151111222233334444555

1111111111111111111112222222222222222222222333333333333

42.7242.5942.4642.3442.2142.0341.9641.8341.7041.5741.4641.3241.1941.0640.9340.8140.6340.5540.4240.2940.1740.0439.9139.7839.6539.5239.3939.2739.1439.0138.8338.7538.6238.4938.3538.2338.1037.9737.8437.7237.5937.4637.3337.2037.0736.9436.8136.6336.5536.4236.2936.1636.0235.8935.76

5657585960616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899

100101102103104105106107108109110

1111111111111111111111111111111122222222222222222222222

CADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCAD

161617171717181818181919191920202020212121212222222223232323242422333344445555666677778

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

56666777788889999

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515151616161617171717181818181919

3333333333444444444444444444444455555555555555555555556

35.6335.5035.3735.2435.1134.9834.8534.7234.5934.4534.3234.1934.0633.9333.8033.6733.5333.4033.2733.1433.0132.8832.7432.6132.4832.3532.2232.0831.9531.8231.6931.5531.4231.2931.1631.0230.8930.7630.6330.4930.3630.2330.0929.9629.8329.6929.5629.4329.2929.1629.0328.8928.7628.6328.49


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–4

REV 0


Table 1–1 Ring Diameter Chart (continued)


111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

BCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCA

8889999

101010101111111112121212131313131414141415151515161616161717171718181818191919192020202021212121

2222223333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

191920202020111122223333444455556666777788889999

10101010111111111212121213

6666666666666666666667777777777777777777777888888888888

28.3628.2328.0927.9627.8227.6927.5627.4227.2927.1527.0226.8926.7526.6226.4826.3526.2126.0825.9425.8125.6825.5425.4125.2725.1425.0024.8724.7324.6024.4624.3324.1924.0623.9223.7923.6523.5123.3823.2423.1122.9722.8422.7022.5722.4322.2922.1622.0221.8921.7521.6221.4821.3421.2121.07

166167168169170170172173174175176177178179180180182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220

2222222222333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

DBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBC

22222222232323232424223333444455556666777788889999

101010101111111112121212131313

3333333333333333333333333333333444444444444444444444444

13131314141414151515151616161617171717181818181919191920202020111122223333444455556666

88888888889999999999999999999999

1010101010101010101010101010101010101010101011

20.9420.8020.6620.5320.3920.2520.1219.9819.8519.7119.5719.4419.3019.1619.0318.8918.7518.6218.4818.3418.2118.0717.9317.8017.6617.5217.3917.2517.1116.9716.8416.7016.5616.4316.2916.1516.0115.8315.7415.6015.4615.3315.1915.0514.9214.7314.6414.5014.3614.2314.0913.9513.8113.6813.54


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–5

REV 0




221222223224225226227228229230231232233234235236237238239240241242243244245246247248249250251252253254255256257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275

3333333333333333333333333333333333333333333444444444444


13141414141515151516161616171717171818181819191919202020202121212122222222232323232424223333444455

4444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444

777788889999

10101010111111111212121213131313141414141515151516161616171717171818181819191919202020

11111111111111111111111111111111111111111112121212121212121212121212121212121212121212131313131313131313131313

13.4013.2613.1312.9912.8512.7112.5712.4412.3012.1612.0211.8811.7511.6111.4711.3311.1911.0610.9210.7810.6410.5010.3710.2310.099.959.819.679.549.409.269.128.988.848.718.578.438.298.158.017.877.747.607.467.327.187.046.906.776.636.496.356.216.075.93

276277278279280281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296297298299300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316317318319320321322323324325326327328329330

4444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444


556666777788889999

10101010111111111212121213131313141414141515151516161616171717171818181819

4555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555

20111122223333444455556666777788889999

101010101111111112121212131313131414

13131313131313131313141414141414141414141414141414141414141414141515151515151515151515151515151515151515151516

5.805.665.525.385.245.104.964.824.694.554.414.274.133.993.853.713.583.443.303.163.022.882.742.602.472.332.192.051.911.771.631.491.351.221.080.940.800.660.520.380.240.100.030.170.310.450.590.730.871.011.151.281.421.561.70


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–6

REV 0




331332333334335336337338339340341342343344345346347348349350351352353354355356357358359360361362363364365366367368369370371372373374375376377378379380381382383384385

4444444444444444444445555555555555555555555555555555555


191919202020202121212122222222232323232424223333444455556666777788889999

10101010

5555555555555555555555555566666666666666666666666666666

141415151515161616161717171718181818191919192020202011112222333344445555666677778

16161616161616161616161616161616161616161617171717171717171717171717171717171717171717181818181818181818181818

1.841.982.122.262.402.532.672.812.953.093.233.373.513.653.783.924.064.204.344.484.624.764.895.035.175.315.455.595.735.876.006.146.236.426.566.706.846.977.117.257.397.537.677.817.948.088.228.368.508.648.778.919.059.199.33

386387388389390391392393394395396397398399400401402403404405406407408409410411412413414415416417418419420421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435436437438439440

5555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555556

DBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBC

1111111112121212131313131414141415151515161616161717171718181818191919192020202021212121222222222323232324242

6666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666667777

8889999

10101010111111111212121213131313141414141515151516161616171717171818181819191919202020201111

18181818181818181818191919191919191919191919191919191919191919192020202020202020202020202020202020202020202021

9.479.609.749.88

10.0210.1610.3010.4310.5710.7110.8510.9911.1311.2611.4011.5411.6811.8211.9512.0912.2312.3712.5112.6412.7812.9213.0613.1913.3313.4713.6113.7513.8814.0214.1614.3014.4314.5714.7114.8514.9815.1215.2615.4015.5315.6715.8115.9516.0816.2216.3616.4916.6316.7716.91


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–7

REV 0




441442443444445446447448449450451452453454455456457458459460461462463464465466467468469470471472473474475476477478479480481482483484485486487488489490491492493494495

6666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666


23333444455556666777788889999

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515151616

7777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777

22223333444455556666777788889999

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515

21212121212121212121212121212121212121212122222222222222222222222222222222222222222222232323232323232323232323

17.0417.1817.3217.4517.5917.7317.8618.0018.1418.2718.4118.5518.6918.8218.9619.1019.2319.3719.5019.6419.7819.9120.0520.1920.3220.4620.6020.7320.8721.0021.1421.2821.4121.5521.6821.8221.9622.0922.2322.3622.5022.6322.7722.9123.0423.1823.3123.4523.5823.7223.8523.9924.1224.2624.39

496497498499500501502503504505506507508509510511512513514515516517518519520521522523524525526527528529530531532533534535536537538539540541542543544545546547548549550

6666666666666666666666666666666677777777777777777777777


161617171717181818181919191920202020212121212222222223232323242422333344445555666677778

7777777777777777777778888888888888888888888888888888888

1516161616171717171818181819191919202020201111222233334444555566667777888899

23232323232323232323242424242424242424242424242424242424242424242525252525252525252525252525252525252525252526

24.5324.6624.8024.9325.0725.2025.3425.4725.6125.7425.8326.0126.1526.2326.4226.5526.6326.8226.9527.0927.2227.3627.4927.6227.7627.8928.0228.1628.2928.4328.5628.6928.8328.9629.0929.2329.3629.4929.6329.7629.8930.0330.1630.2930.4330.5630.6930.8230.9631.0931.2831.3631.4931.6231.75


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR1–8

REV 0




551552553554555556557558559560561562563564565566567568569570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589590591592593594595596597598599600601602603604605

7777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777


8889999

101010101111111112121212131313131414141415151515161616161717171718181818191919192020202021212121

8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888999999999

99

1010101011111111121212121313131314141414151515151616161617171717181818181919191920202020111122223

26262626262626262626262626262626262626262627272727272727272727272727272727272727272727282828282828282828282828

31.8932.0232.1532.2832.4132.5532.6832.8132.9433.0733.2133.3433.4733.6033.7333.8634.0034.1334.2634.3934.5234.6534.7834.9135.0435.1835.3135.4435.5735.7035.8335.9636.0936.2236.3536.4836.6136.7436.8737.0037.1337.2637.3937.5237.6537.7837.9138.0438.1738.3038.4338.5638.6938.8138.94

606607608609610611612613614615616617618619620621622623624625626627628629630631632633634635636637

77777777778888888888888888888888

DBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBCADBDC

222222222323232324242233334444555566667789

99999999999999999999999999999991

333444455556666777788889999

1010100–

2828282828282828282829292929292929292929292929292929292929293031

39.0739.2039.3339.4639.5939.7239.8439.9740.1040.2340.3640.4940.6140.7440.8741.0041.1341.2541.3841.5141.6441.7641.8942.0242.1542.2742.4042.5342.6542.780.00

–


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR2–1

REV 0

SECTION 2 – IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECTOR RELATED)

2-1 ARTIFACT PROBLEM

The following illustrations are examples which may be caused by DAS component failure.

Single Channel Ring

The failure of one input capacitor or one Detector channel causes a singlefailure . Illustration shows an example of single channel ring. To identify aDAS channel, measure the ring diameter and use the ring diameter chart(Section 1-2).

Phantom

Single Channel Streak

If a single channel failure occurs during one view period, it appears assingle line on image (streak). To identify the DAS channel which caused thisstreak, use the circle cursor to measure the distance from image center tothe streak, then use the ring diameter chart (Section 1-2) to determine theDAS channel. This failure can also be caused by a single channel signalview data drop during data conversion or data transfer.

Phantom

22 Channel W ide Band

A unit conditioning circuit failure causes 22 channels to fail. Illustrationshows an example of a 22 Channel Wide Band Ring.Phantom


2242063


DAS/DETECTOR2–2

blank


2242063


X–RAY GENERATORi

REV 0

X–RAY GENERATOR

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – FAILURE ANAL YSIS 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 LED INDICATORS 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1-1 Power Cont Board 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-2 INV Cont Board 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-3 FIL Cont Board 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2242063


X–RAY GENERATORii

blank


2242063


X–RAY GENERATOR1–1

REV 0

SECTION 1 – FAILURE ANALYSIS

1-1 LED INDICATORS

1-1-1 Power Cont Board

The Power Cont board contains 42 LEDs that provide XG system status and information. During XG system trouble-shooting, some LEDs provide valuable information that speeds up the troubleshooting process.

The LEDs D1 ∼ D5 illuminates only during OFF–LINE exposure mode, that is, when the cable is connected betweenCN15 and CN1. These LEDs display the XG system status during OFF–LINE exposure.

Illustration 1–1 LED Locations

POWER CONT Board

D35 ∼ D50D22 ∼ D34D14 ∼ D21

D1 ∼ D5


2242063



REV 0

1-1-1 Power Cont Board (continued)

XG FAIL D1 When OFF, it indicates that some failure(s) occurred in the XG system.The failures it detects are:

� Over kv, Under kv, Over mA� Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)� Power Failure (+VCC, –VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)� X–Ray Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW → INV CONT board)� Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)� Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17� Exposure back–up timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)

POWER D2 The DC Power Supply for (+5V) POWER CONT board is normal.

XG ACT D3 (XG Active) The rotor is in operation.

XRY ON D4 (X–Ray ON) X–Ray is being emitted.

XG RDY D5 (XG Ready)The rotor is running at the specified speed and HV ON command will be accepted.

HV ON D14 (High Voltage On) The high voltage output command is received from OC.

XG RDY D15 (XG Ready)The rotor is running at the specified speed and the HV ON command will be accepted.

XG ON D16 (X–Ray Generator ON) The rotor start command is received from OC.

KV1 D17 KV selection code.

KV0 D18 KV selection code.

MA2 D19 mA selection code.



XG FAIL D22 This LED lights when the following failures are detected:� Over kv, Under kv, Over mA� Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)� Power Failure (+VCC, –VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)� X–Ray Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW → INV CONT board)� Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)� Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17� Exposure back–up timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)

OVP4 D23 (Positive Side) Over KV is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.

OVN4 D24 (Negative Side) Over KV is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.

OVP1 D25 (Positive Side)Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.

OVN1 D26 (Negative Side)Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.

DVP4 D27 (Positive Side) Under KV is detected.

DVN4 D28 (Negative Side) Under KV is detected.

OLP D29 (Positive Side) Over mA is detected.

OLN D30 (Negative Side) Over mA is detected.


2242063



REV 0

1-1-1 Power Cont Board (continued)

OVH D31 (Over Heat) The overheat on the X–Ray Tube housing is detected.

ROT OC D32 (Rotor Overcurrent) The overcurrent for the rotor is detected.

FIL OC D33 (Filament Overcurrent) The Overcurrent for the heating transformer is detected.

POWER FAIL D34 The main D.C. power supply (+VCC, –VCC) failed (detected on FIL CONT board).

ST3 D35 (Status 3) Information code. (see Table 1–1)




PWR11 D39 (Power 11) Power reference code for the heating transformer.












Table 1–1 ST0 – ST3 Information

Error Messages LED Status35 36 37 38

HV ON overtime (14.67sec / less than 100mA) � � � �

HV ON overtime (5.54sec / more than 100mA) � � � �

FIL3 switch does not match SOFT switch � � � �

80kV or 140kV can not be selected � � � �

RAM over error � � � �

RAM set error � � � �

RAM clear error � � � �

3 no answer (serial communication) � � � �

3 NACK (serial communication) � � � �

Hard error (serial communication) � � � �


2242063



REV 0

1-1-2 INV Cont Board

Illustration 1–2 LED Locations

INV CONT Board

LED 1LED 2LED 3LED 4LED 5LED 6LED 7LED 8LED 9

The following LED descriptions apply when that LED lights (LED ON).

START LED1 The rotor start command is given from Power Cont board or or by the S11 switch (START)

HSPD LED2 (High Speed) The Power Cont board or the jumper J1 (HSPD) select high speedmode. J1 is installed for HSPD mode.

ACC LED3 (Acceleration) The rotor is in acceleration.

RUN LED4 The rotor is running.

BRK LED5 (Brake) The rotor is in deceleration.

RUN RYL LED6 (Run Relay) Relay K8 is energized (supplies rotor power to the stator).

BRK RYL LED7 (Brake Relay) Relay K7 is energized (supplies deceleration power to the stator).

OC LED8 (Overcurrent) Overcurrent is detected in the rotor inverter output.

EXP INTL LED9 (Exposure Interlock) The rotor is running at the specified speed.


2242063



REV 0

1-1-3 FIL Cont Board

Illustration 1–3 LED Location

FIL CONT Board

D1

VCC D1 When OFF, it indicates the power failure (+VCC, –VCC).


2242063



blank

GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)

GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

SYTEC I ADVAN. DIAG..pdf

Documents

Transcript of SYTEC I ADVAN. DIAG..pdf